Giao An Anh 7

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn
G/v : Nguyn Th
English 7
2011.
Week 1 Preparing date: 19/8/
Teaching date: 23/8/2011 Period 1st Revision. I.Objectives: After the lesson, students will review the main contents of the lessons which are learned in class 6 : The simple present tense, the present continuous tense, near future, wh- questions, comparative and superlative of short adjectives. II.Language focus: 1.Structure: 2.Vocabulary: III.Teaching aids: Textbooks IV.Teaching Procedures: Stages/steps Contents Activities 1 Greeting -Work in Pairs Warm up Time:3 - Cch cho hi thng thng - Hi thm sc kho , gia nh, bn b. T - Wc Presentation 1. The tenses of verbs Time:15 a. The present simple tense. * Tobe: am, is, are (+) I am = Im (-) I am not = Im not (?) Am I.? We We You are You are not They They We Are You ? They He He She is She is not It It 1 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Is She .? He It * Ordinary verbs : (+) I We V( without To ) Vs(es) You They (-) I We You They He She It (?) She It
G/v : Nguyn Th
She He It
+ Dont + V( without To )
+ Doesnt +V( without To ) I We + V ? Do He You Does +V?
They b. The present continuous tense: (+) S + am / is / are + Ving . (-) S + am / is / are + not + Ving. (?) Am / is / are + S + Ving ? c. Near future : (+) S + am / is / are + going to + V. (-) S + am / is / are + not + going to + V. (?) Am / is / are + S + going to + V ? 2. Wh- questions : * What : - Whats your name ? => My name is An. Whats her name ? => Her name is Hoa . - What do you do? => I am a teacher . What does he do ? => He is a doctor . * Where : 2 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Practice Time:15
Where do you live? => I live on Nguyen Du street . Where does she live ? => She lives at 135 Hang Bai Street. * How many + Ns . How many students are there in your class? .. tables ? * What time / When What time do you usually get up ? When do you do your homework? * How : - How are you ? => Im fine, thanks. - How do you go to school every day ? => I go to school by bike . * How old : How old are you ? * Why? Why does he have bad marks? * Which : Which shirt do you like : red or blue? * Who : Who is Mrs Lan talking to? 3. Comparative and superlative of short adjectives a. Comparative: S1 + tobe + adj + er + than + S2. EX: She is taller than me . b. Superlative : S + tobe + the + adj + est EX: He is the tallest in my class . Ex1: Give correct form of the verbs -Work in a. Oh, no! It ( rain ) . What a pity! We can't Individual (go out) for a swim. b. What Peter ( do ) on the floor? c. What sports you ( do ) ? d. My sister always ( wear ) nice clothes for work. Today she ( wear ) a blue jacket and skirt. Ex2: Read this passage and answer the questions. -Individual I am Hoa. I get up at six every morning. I 3 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
take a shower , then I have a big breakfast. I go to school at aquarter to seven. I have classes from seven to a quarter past eleven. I have lunch at half past eleven. In the afternoon, I play sports. I go home at five oclock. In the evening, I watch television, then I do my homework. I go to bed at ten oclock.. Questions: 1. When does she get up? 2. What time does she go to school? 3. Does she take a shower every morning? 4. What does she do then? 5. Does she have lunch at twelve? 6. What does she do at five oclock? 7. What does she do in the evening? 8. What time does she go to bed? Produtio n Time:7 Homewor k Time: 3 Work in pairs Whole class Work in pairs to ask and answer about themselves. -Give 5 sentences with each grammar - Ask students to revise and remember all the structures they have learned in the lesson . -Prepare for the next lesson by preread the new words. V. Self-valuation Preparing date: 21/8/ 2011. Teaching date:24/8/2011 Back to school A. FRIENDS (A 1, 3, 4, 5)
UNIT1: Period 2nd I Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to - Greet, ask and respond the greetings - Introduce newcomers - Listen to the conversation and practice with their partner II. Language contents 1. Vocabulary: classmate, also, to meet, will begin, hurry (A5). 4 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th good; Me, too;
2.Structures: So am I; Nice to meet you; Just fine; Pretty How is everything? Wh - Questions and Answers (what, who) III.Teaching aids: Textbooks , cassette ,tape , papers ,picture, ....... IV.Teaching Procedures: Stages/st Contents eps Warm up Slap the board : Time:5 - What's your name ? Yes, I am - How are you today ? Good bye - Good bye Class 7A - What class are you in ? Very well - Are you a new student? My name' s Hoa. So am I / Me ,too Thanks . Presenta 1. Matching: tion - Pretty good. Khng tt Time:15 lm - How is everything? Ti cng vy - Nice to see you. Kh tt - So am I / Me too. Mi vic nh th no? - Just fine. Rt vui khi gp bn - Not bad. Bnh thng thi
Activities - Ss listen and slap the suitable response . -Work in Individual
-Work in whole class
- Ss listen then practice (?) Who are talking together? reading in - T plays the tape or reads the dialogue groups of 2 . twice - T checks sts understanding. (QuestionsTextbook- p11) 2. Dialogue : ( A1 / P. 10) Key: 5 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 1. Her name is Hoa. 2. She is in class 7A. 3. Nam is also in class 7A. Practice Time:15
G/v : Nguyn Th
- T reads the dialogues or plays the tape (twice) - Ss listen and then fill in the gaps with the expressions from the box. - Ss practice reading the dialogues in pairs. 1.Gap fill; (A4- P12, 13) */ Answers. a. ... How are you? -Pretty good... How about you, Tan? - Not bad,... - Me, too. b. ... How is everything? - Ok, ... How are you today,...? - Just fine,... -..., So am I. 2. Picture Cue Drill: (A5- P13) */ Answers: c, b, d, a, -Teacher encourages Ss to use the new greetings expressions from the matching.
Mapped dialogue
- Ss listen and then fill in the gaps with the expressions from the box. - Ss practice reading the dialogues in pairs. -Sts write the letters of the dialogue in the order they hear -Work in groups - Sts work in pair to make dialogues. - Sts practice their own dialogue in front of class.
Produtio n Time:8
Nam ..... morning,... ...too. How is.........? How.........? .......,thank you Goodbye. See......... Bye 6 English 7 2011-2012
Ba . ....morning,... nice........again. ..........thanks.
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Example exchange: Ba: Good morning, Nam. Nam: Good morning Ba. Ba: Nice to see you again. Nam: Me, too. How are you? Ba: Fine, thanks. How about you? Nam: Im very well, thank you. Ba: Goodbye. Nam: Bye.
G/v : Nguyn Th
Homewor - Ask students to revise and remember k all the structures they have learned in Time: 2 the lesson -Prepare for the next lesson by pre-read the new words.
T Whole class
V - Self valuation : ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... .............
7 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Preparing date 22/8/2011 Teaching date: 27/8/2011
UNIT1:
Period 3rd I.Objectives: After this lesson the Ss can - Read and understand the passage about Hoa - Ask and answer about Hoa - Remember some new words II. Language content 1 - Grammar. - Question words.Wh - questions 2 - Vocabulary. - different from, unhappy, to miss, why - because III.Teaching aids. cards, an extra board, cassette, tape.. IV.Teaching procedures. Stages/steps Content Activities Warm up Time:3 * Wordsquare Key: S C H O O L D T T B I G H N school, big, uncle, new, old U N C L E A E D U J I T P I aunt, friend E A S V N P R student, happy, live N E W E U Y F parent T N E R A P Q
Back to school Lesson: 2 A.Friends A2
S s w o rk s in t w o g
8 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th r o u p s to fi n d o u t c o rr e ct w o r d s.
Pre reading Time:15
1.Vocabulary different ( adj) khc, khc nhau Example happy # unhappy vui # bun Antonym (to) miss nh (ai) Situation -T presents some new words. * Check : Matching - T gives sentences on extra board. 2. T/F statement prediction 1. Hoa is from Hue. 2. She lives with her parents in Ha noi. 3. She has a lot of friends in Ha noi. 4. She misses her friends in Hue. 5. She is happy now. 9
- Sts practice reading in chorus, individuals.
- Ss predict and give feedback
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn While reading Time:15
G/v : Nguyn Th - Ss read the text silently and check their prediction.
- Get the S to listen to the tape twice (Ex 2 - page 11) 1. Read & check - T checks reading ( calls 1 or 2 ss to read aloud ) Key: 1.T 2.F 3.F 4.T 5.F 2. Lucky numbers( A2/ P.11 ) 1. (a) Where is Hoa from? 2. (c) Does she have a lot of friends in Ha Noi? 3. LN 4. (e) Why is Hoa unhappy now? 5. (b) Who is she staying with? 6. (d) How is her school different from her old school? 7. LN 8. LN Key: a. Hoa is from Hue. b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt. c. No, she doesnt. d. Her new school is bigger than her old school. Her new school has more students than her old school. e. Because she misses her parents and her friends. *Transformation writing change Hoa to I and change information E.g : I am a new student in class 7A. I am from Hue and my parents still live there E.g : I am a new student in class. I am from and my parents... I live with in - T checks some Ss writing
- Ss play the game in two groups.
Post reading Time:8
Ss work individually to write another text.
10 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Reading comprehension for detail - Whole class Homework information. Time: 2 - Describe sbs personal information - Do exercises A3 page 4 in workbook - Prepare A 4, 5 page 12, 13. V - Self valuation :
Preparing date:24/8/2011 Teaching date: 29/8/2011
UNIT1:
th
Back to school
Period 4 Lesson4:- Section: B1,2,3 I.Objectives: After this lesson, the Ss can - Ask and give personal informations. - Introduce newcommers - Write a passage to tell about oneself and others in the class II. Language contents: 1- Grammar. - Question words. 2. Vocabulary. Family name (sur name),middle name,first name,talk to, home address, age III.Teaching aids: Picture, cassette, tape.. IV.Teaching procedures. Stages Content Activities Warm up *Brainstormings : -Work in Time:3 Topic: Personal informations. Individual
Hoa
Presentati English 7 2011-2012
-Hang on the picture . 11 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn on Time:15
G/v : Nguyn Th -Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher and practice
Practice Time:15
-Ask the S to guess the contents of the picture. 1. Vocabulary *Explain: Family name (sur name): Tn h middle name: tn m first name: Tn talk to: ni vi age: tui home address: a ch gia nh *Check: Slap the board. Call some pairs to make up dialogues to ask for and give personal informations Ma Pha i Hoa m 2. Review: Wh -questions Wh- questions: Who, What, Where, When, How... 1. Listen, Then practice - Get the S to listen to the tape twice. - T observes and corrects pronunciation if necessary. - Some groups give their answers. - T corrects and lets sts copy. - T asks sts to write and fill the Question word in the blank in B2. - T corrects and lets sts work in pairs - Sts practice about themselves - T helps if necessary. 2. Complete the dialogue: (B2- P16) Who ... who ... Which ... Where ... Where ... How
-Work in pairs -Individual
Sts listen to the tape twice then practice working in groups in turns then answer the questions. - Work in pairs
12 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Prodution Time:8
G/v : Nguyn Th - T asks Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions to complete the form. ( Closed pairs -Opened pairs )
3. Word cue drill: a. Nam/ Nguyen/ 15/ 32 Nguyen Du st b. Thuy/ Bui/ 14/ 34 Le Hong Phong st c. Hoa/ Pham/ 12 Da Nang st d. Minh/ Tran/ 13/ Tran Hung Dao st -->Eg:S1: Whats Nams family name? S2: His family names Nguyen. S1:How old is he? S2:Hes 15 S1: Where does he live? S2: 32 Nguyen Du street. - T checks some .
Homework Time: 2
-Ask the S to learn by heart new words Whole class and structures. -Ask the S to write informations for all of the maembers in their family. -Ask the S to do ex in ex.book. -Prepare the next lesson.
V - Self valuation :
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................
UNIT1:
th
Period 5 I.Objectives: After this lesson, the S can ask about transportation and distances. II.Language focus: 1- Grammar: -How far is it from.....to .....? -How do/ does + S + V......? 2- Vocabulary: Far, distances, how far,meter, kilometer 13 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Back to school Lesson4 - Section: B4,5
Preparing date : 5/9/2011 Teaching date: 7/9/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
III.Teaching aids: Extra-boards, papers picture, cards, cassette, IV. Procedures: Stages/st Content eps Warm up Wordsquare (an extra board) Time:6 W W W H Y H W H E N E B A O N R B T O W E F R O M * Answers: Who, how Where, what, at, by Why, from, when, on, to Presentati 1.Vocabulary on -Far # near: Xa # gn Time:15 -Distance: khong cch situation -Means of transport: Phng tin giao thng (Pictures) T gets Ss to read the vocab chorally and individually. -Check the meaning of the words * Check vocab: What and where 2. Presentation dialogue: B4/ P16. 3. Model sentences: S1: How far is it from your house to school? S2: About one kilometer How far is it from....to..... ? -Its (about)..
Activities - Work in whole class
-Work in whole class
-Work in Individual
- Work in pairs
14 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Practice Time:15
G/v : Nguyn Th - Listen to the tape
T reads or plays the tapes twice. 1. Picture drill: / B5/ p17 * Wordcue drill.(pictures) - school/ 1km - the post office/ 700meters - the market/ 2kms. - The movie theater/ 3 kms. - The bus stop/ 500ms
T- WC *Example exchange: S1: How far is it from your house to -Work in pairs [ school] ? S2: ( Its) about...... Productio -T asks Ss to work in pairs to get -Work in n information then Write a passage about whole class Time:8 your friend. Suggestions: - Whats your name? My names ....... - How old are you? I am ... years old. - Which grade are you in? I am in grade ... - Where do you learn? I learn at ... secondary school. - Where do you live? I live in .... - How far is it from your home to school? Its about... *Eg: My friends names Dung. She lives at ......Its about.....She goes to school by.... Homewor k Time: 1 - Asking about distance and means of Whole class transports - Learn by heart the new words. - Do B3,4,5 ( p 6-7). - Get ready for the next lesson B6- 7.
V - Self valuation : ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................... 15 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
............................................................................................................................................... .............
UNIT1:
Period 6th I.Objectives: After this lesson, P can Listen in order to know about the about places, transportation and distances. Listen and fill the form II.Language focus: 1 - Grammar. - How far .....? - What is your name? - Where do you live? 2 - Vocabulary. - take a bus, stamps, at recess, to post,.. III.Teaching aids: Map, cassette,.. IV.Procedures: Stages Content Activities - Work in Warm up Chatting Time:5 individual Where do you live? How far is it from your house to school? How do you go to school? Pre listening Time:14 1. Vocabulary take a bus: stamps at recess to post 2. Prediction: Lans house to school: 16 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc -Work in groups to pre dict the distance from
Back to school Lesson5 : - Section: B6-7
Preparing date: 4/9/2011 Teaching date: 8/9/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
Lans house to post office: School to movie theater: Movie theater to post office: Eg: S1: How far is it from school to Lans house? S2: Its about [1 km]. While -Hang on the map listening. -Ask the S to say about the distances Time:15 between the places. -Get the S to listen to the tape twice and write the distances between the places. -Call the S to compare their answer with one another. -Have the S to listen to the tape once more to check their answers. *Feedback. a, The school to Lans house: 300 meters. b, Lans house to the post office: 700 meters. c, The school to the movie theater: 3 kilometers. d, The movie theater to the post office: 2 kilometers. -Ask the S to work in pairs to practice those dialogues Post . * Survey listening *Eg: Time:10 S1:Whats your name? S2; My names Hoa S1:Where do you live? S2:30 Tran Phu st S1:How do you go to school? S2:By bike S1:How far is it from your house to school? S2:About 1 km Name: Pham Thi Hoa Address: 30 Tran phu St Means of transport: Bike 17 English 7 2011-2012
-Ss listen carefully and then write the distanses, then compare with their partners. -Listen again and check. - Give the answer
-Ss work in pairs to ask and answer to complete the survey.
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Distance: 1km Eg: My friends names Hoa............... -Ask the S to introduce about their information follow the cards on the board using pronouns: He, She, They. -Correct their mistakes: Eg: My friends names Hoa...............She/He lives at....Its about......from......to. She/He goes..........
-Rewrite the information in the survey youve got.
Homework Time: 1
- Listen to specific information about Whole class distances. - Do exercises B 4, 5 page 7 in workbook. - Prepare A 1, 2 of Unit 2 page 19. 20.
Self- valuation:
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ............. ...............................................................***............................... ..........................................
18 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION th Period 7 : PartA - A telephone number: (A1.2- P. 19. 20 ) I . Objectives : After finishing this lesson , the Ss will be able to - Know how to read, ask for and give telephone number. II . Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: Telephone number ,call,telephone directory 2. Grammar : wh-questions Whats your telephone number? III . Teaching aids :- text book, cassette, tape, picture, card IV . Teaching procedures : Stage Content Activity Warm up Bingo: number 0 9 Whole class (5 mins) Teacher reads: 2, 6, 7, 1, 3, 9, 5, 8, 4, 0 Presentati on (14 mins) 1.Vocabulary - Ask ss to look at the telephone Whole class directory and asks: Where is it from? - Telephone directory (n): danh b in thoi - Call (v): Gi in - Will (v): s (Ex: I will call you) Whole class Reads new words and asks ss to repeat before copying into notebook - Introduce structure 2. Structures a. Asking about the telephone numbers Ex: Whats your telephone numbers? 8, 237. 721 - Read the model sentences 19 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Ss read after the T. in chocus - Guide how to read telephone numbers b. The way to read telephone numbers Ex: 8. 531.701 Work in Explain the way to read difficult individual numbers Note: Khi c, ngt sau s m khu vc v sau mi 3 s ( nh khi vit ) + 88 : eight eight double eight ex: 800, 222, 000, 111 Practice: (14 mins) A1: Read Ask ss to practice reading the telephone numbers - Then ask ss to work in pairs. One reads names of 6 people, another reads the telephone numbers for them - Ask ss to read the telephone number and other ss call the name of the person who has those numbers A2: Listen and write the telephone numbers Explain the requirement of this exercise Ask ss to listen then write the telephone numbers - Ss listen and write. Then compare exchange the answers - Ask ss to listen again and T. checks - Let ss listen the last time and give correct answers - T. gives the correct answers Answer keys: a. 8 251 645 b. 8 250 514 c. 8 521 936 d. 8 351 793 e. 8 237 041 20 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Work in individual Work pairs in
Whole class Work pairs in
G/v : Nguyn Th
Productio n (9 mins)
f. 8 821 652 A3: Listen - Ask ss to listen to the dialogue then practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue before the class - Ask ss to use the gird to tell their own friends 1. Do you often talk with someone on the telephone? 2. Do you know the question asking for telephone numbers? 3. Do you know how to give your telephone number to other? *Grids: NAME ADDRESS T. NUMBER Lan 1 Le Loi 8 262 019 Street
Whole class Work pairs Work pairs in in
Work groups
in
*Dialogue Build: S1:Whats your name? live? Street S1: Whats your telephone number? S2: 8 262 019 homework English 7 2011-2012 - Get ss to remind how to read & ask Whole class 21 Nm hc S2: My names Lan. S1:Where do you Work pairs S2: I live on Le Loi in
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (1 mins) about telephone number.
G/v : Nguyn Th
V. Self - valuation ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. .............................
.......................................................................
Preparing date: 10/9/2011 Teaching date: 14/9/2011 Unit 2 : Period 8th: English 7 2011-2012
PERSONAL INFORMATION
PartA - A telephone number : (A3,4) 22 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
I . Objectives : After finishing this lesson , the Ss will be able to - Know how to talk on the phone and make arrangements II . Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: free (a) Would you like....? 2. Grammar The Future Simple Tense III . Teaching aids :- text book, tape, cassette IV . Teaching procedures : Stage Content Activity Warm up Dictation: 8 262 019 ; 8 211 800 ; 7 345 Whole class (5 mins) 610 ; 5 267 119 ; 8 235 235 ; 6 755 463 ; 8 531 701; Presetatio n (15 mins) 1.Vocabulary - Free: Rnh ri Ex: I am free now - Will : s Ex: We will meet in front of the theater - Dont be late: ng mun nh * Open Prediction Who are they? What are they doing? What are they talking about? 2. Grammar: The future simple tense with will Model sentences + I Will see you tomorrow Whole class + We will meet in front of the movie theater + It will start at 7 oclock (?) Will you be free tomorrow? (?) Will she go to Hanoi next Sunday? - Yes, I will - Yes, she will -> Th tng lai n gin din t mt hnh ng s sy ra trong tng lai (will + V inf) 23 Nm hc
Whole class
Whole class
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 3. Structures a) Mi ai lm g - Would you like to see a movies - Would you like to go to the circus? - Sure b) Cu cu khin ph nh Ex: Dont be late! Dont talk in class practice: (14 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
A3: Listen - Ask ss to listen to the dialogue then Whole class practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to read the dialogue Work in before the class - Ask ss to use the gird pairs to tell their own friends 1. Do you often talk with someone on the telephone? 2. Do you know the question asking for telephone numbers? 3. Do you know how to give your telephone number to other? - Grids: NAME ADDRESS T. NUMBER Lan 1 Le Loi 8 262 019 Street ....... Work pairs S1:Whats your name? S2: My names Lan. S1:Where do you live? S2: 1 Le Loi Street 24 in
Dialogue Build:
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn telephone A4. the -
G/v : Nguyn Th S1: Whats your Whole class
number? S2: 8 262 019 Listen and read. Then answer questions Ask ss to listen to the tape twice Let ss read the dialogue in chorus Have ss practice in pairs to read the dialogue again Ask ss to answer the question and then check the answers with their partner
* Answer Key: a/ Phong and Tam. b/ They will see a movie. c/ Theyll meet at 6:45. d/ They will meet in front of the Productio n (8 mins) - Ask ss to make arrangements (on the phone the same as listening) using information that have just been listened - Ask some questions Work in 1. Do you sometimes go to the correct? individual Do you sometimes go to the zoo? - With your friends? 2. How do you often go there? - Get ss to do homework and prepare Whole class new lesson at home
homework
(1 min)
V. Self - valuation ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. .............................. 25 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
Preparing date: 11/9/2011 Teaching date: 16/9/2011 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION th Period 9 : PartA - A telephone number : (A5,6,7) I . Objectives : After finishing this lesson , the Ss will be able to - Know how to talk on the phone and make arrangements II . Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: sorry, back , out 2. Grammar The Future Simple Tense III . Teaching aids :- text book, extra board , picture , tape, cassette IV . Teaching procedures : Stage Content Activity
26 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc

Warm up
G/v : Nguyn Th
(5 mins)
Prelistening
(7 mins)
- Remind the way to read telephone Whole class numbers. -Ask students to write and read 5 telephone numbers. Ex: 3910245 36666210 3725222 3758619 3855716 1.Vocabulary Whole class - sure (adv): chc chn ri - to be back: quay tr li - to be out: ra ngoi, i vng Check :What and Where *. Pre - questions - Do you sometimes go to movie? - What do you say to ask your friend to Whole class go to the movies with you? - Do you need to know the place to meet? - How to get to the theater? - What do you ask to get the information? - Ask ss to listen to the tape (twice) - Ss listen and complete exercise. Then exchange the answer - Call ss to listen again and gives the correct answers * Answer key a. 8.545 545 b. a movie c. Lans house d. Bus *Mapped Dialogue: Tan Nam Whole class Work pairs in
While listening:
(6 mins)
Postlistening
(5 mins)
Work pairs
in
Whole class
27 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn What...do tomorrow
G/v : Nguyn Th
homework
(1 min)
go...stadium. Mornin a football match/ g? Would..like...withm What...watch? e? 4:30/...meet at Yes. 4:15. When...start? in front of...stadium. Where....meet? OK! Example Exchange: S1: What will you do tomorrow? S2: Ill go to the stadium. S1: What will you watch there? S2: A football match. Would you like to come with me? S1: Yes. When will it/ start? S2: At 4:30. Lets meet at 4:15. S1: Wher will we meet? S2: in front of the stadium - Get ss to do homework and prepare Whole class new lesson at home
V. Self - valuation ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. ...............................
28 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit:2 PERSONAL INFORMATION th Period 10 : Part B - My birthday : ( B1,2,3 ) I . Objectives : After finishing this lesson , the Ss will be able to - Speak, write and use ordinal numbers - Ask and answer about the date of month II . Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: ordinal numbers, months 2. Grammar Wh- question : What s the date of birth? III . Teaching aids :- text book, extra board , picture , tape, cassette IV . Teaching procedures : Stage Content Activity warm up * Dictation: Whole (5 mins) class 8 262 019 ; 8 211 800 ; 7 345 610 ; 5 267 119 ; 8 235 235 6 755 463 ; 8 Presentation (15 mins) practice (15 mins) 531 701; 1. Vocabulary - introduce ordinal numbers; how to pronounce and how to write. * Check: Rub out and remember B1: Listen and repeat - Ask ss to look at the book and listen then repeat * Note: The writing and spelling ( pronoun of some ordinal numbers) Ex: First, second third, fifth, with twentieth and the end of th - Let ss read ordinal numbers silently - Call some ss to read before the 29 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Whole class Whole class
Preparing date: 14/9/2011 Teaching date:17/9/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
class - Listen and correct mistakes B2: Listen and write the dates - explain the way to do exercise (task of exercise) - ask ss to listen to the tape twice - Ss listen and take s notes the numbers - Asks ss to exchange the answer together - Ask ss to listen to the tape again - Ss listen and check - Call ss to give the answers - T. corrects - Call 2 ss to go to the board and write the dates that the have just heart Answer - The first of July (1st July) - The nineteenth (19th) - The Sixth (6th) - The fourteenth (14th) - The seventeenth (17th) - The third-first (31th) B3: Write the months in order from first to Matching: A B May thng 8 June 6 July 5 August 7 March 9 September 3 - Let ss do individually - Then compare with their partners - correct and read the months - Ask some ss to read again production English 7 2011-2012 T. asks ss to work in groups 30
Whole class
Work in individual
Work in Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (9mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
- T. gives 2 groups flashcards on groups which T wrote the months (in Vietnamese) and on that ones T. wrote in English - T. asks ss in group 1 to give their flash cards (Ex: in VN) Ss in group 2 have to give the flash cards in English and again - At the end of the game, T. raise the winner - Ss write down in their notebooks homework Learn ordinal numbers Whole (1min) - Do ex: B1, B2 (in W.B page 10) class V. Self - valuation ................................................................................................................. ........................ ................................................................................................................. ........................
.......................................................................
Unit:2 PERSONAL INFORMATION th Period 11 : Part B - My birthday : ( B 4,5 ) I . Objectives : After finishing this lesson , the Ss will be able to - Practise asking and answering about date of birth, using the Future Simple tense, completing this form. II . Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: nervous, to be worried ,birth, birthday 2. Grammar Wh- question : What s the date of birth? * Review preposition: on about the date III . Teaching aids :- text book, extra board , picture , tape, cassette IV . Teaching procedures : 31 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Stage

warm up
G/v : Nguyn Th Activity Whole class Whole class
(5 mins)
Presentation
Content - Playing a game Simon says B4:Listen . Then practice with a partner *Set the scene - T. introduces situation of dialogue (Hoa n ng k hc tp vi thy gio Tn) *Open Prediction: What will Mr Tan ask Hoa? (Ask ss to guess the questions which T. Tan will asks Hoa) - Ss guess questions about the name - Ss guess question about the age - Ss guess question about the date of birth 1. Vocabulary - Date of birth (n): ngy sinh nht - nervous (adj): hi hp Ex: Im very nervous - Worry: lo lng - Ex: Dont worry I am worry 2. Structures * Preposition on - ng trc cc t ch thi gian Ex: On Sunday, Monday , my next birth, May 25th * Cch hi v ngy sinh nht - What is your date of birth? - June twenty first * Review The simple future : Will - Youll have lots of new friends soon - Ill be 14 on next my birthday - Ask ss to close the books and listen to the dialogue (once or twice) - then ss say all the questions which Mr Tan said in the dialogue Check ss prediction : 32
(15 mins)
Work in individual
Whole class
Whole class
practice
(17 mins)
Whole class
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th Work in pairs
production
(7 mins)
homework
(1min) English 7 2011-2012
- Compare them with the questions that ss guess - Ask ss to listen the dialogue again then read in pairs - Ss play the role and read the dialogue Comprehension Questions: - Ask ss to ask and answer the questions - Then call some ss to ask and answer the questions before class (Ss practice in pairs) - Correct for ss *Answer a. Hoa is 13 years old b. She will be 14 on her next birth c. Her birthday is on June eighth d. Hoa lives with her uncle and aunt e. Hoa is worried because she does not have any friends B5: Complete this form T. explains the task of this exercise - Ask ss to read B4 again to complete the form - Ss do individually - go round the class and check - Call some ss to write on the board - Correct - Name: Pham Thi Hoa - Date of birth: June eighth - Address: 12 Tran Hung Dao street - Telephone number: 8 2 6 2 0 1 9 * Survey Exercise B3 p 11(w.b) Complete the form using information of yourselves Exercise b4: P11 (W.B) 33
Work in pairs
Work in individual
Work in individual Whole class
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit:2 PERSONAL INFORMATION th Period 12 : Part B - My birthday : ( B 6,7,8,9 ) I . Objectives : After finishing this lesson , the Ss will be able to - To write the invitation cards to the party. II . Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: invite, party ,give, leave, joy the fun 2. Grammar Future Simple tense. III . Teaching aids :- text book, extra board , picture , tape, cassette IV . Teaching procedures : Stage Content Activity warm up Whole class Jumbled words: (5mins) Janaury - January Juen - June Mya - May Apirl- April Ocberot - October Desember - December pre1. Vocabulary Whole class reading party (n) (picture) : Ba tic (15 mins) invite (v) ( mime): mi finish (v)(antonym - start): kt thc give (v): a cho, tng Join (v): tham gia fun (n) vui v / cuc vui - Check: rub out and remember * Open Prediction: You are going to read about Lan, read and find out the answers to these questions 1. How old is she? 2. Where does she live? Work in 3. When is her birthday? individual 4. Will she have a party for her birthday? 34 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
V. Self - valuation ................................................................................................................. ........................ Preparing date: 18/9/2011 Teaching date:21/9/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
whilereading
(18 mins)
5. What time will her birthday party start? Finish? - Presentation the part: (B6 .P. 26) - Ask ss to read the text silently and give out the answers to the questions above - ss read the text and answer the questions 1. 12 2. at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet street 3. May 25th 4. Yes 5. At 5 oclock/ at nine - Let read invitation card - Ss read the invitation card and complete it, using the information from the text - then exchange the answers - Call some ss to read their own complete card - Give feedback 2. Complete this invitation card to Lans party. Dear_______, I am having a birthday party on Sunday, May 25. The party will be at my house at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Steet. from 5:oo to 9:00. I hope you will come and join the fun. Love, Lan Tel. 8 674 758 B7- P27:Think and write. T. explains the task of this exercise - Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions (using the future simple tense) - T. calls some ss to answer before the class, then corrects a/ flower/ shirt/ dress/ book/ . 35
Whole class
Work in individual
Work in individual
Work in pairs
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
b/ taxi/ bus/ bicycle/ motocycle/ . c/ hide and seek/ dace/ sing on Karaoke/ . d/ birthdays cake/ candy/ chicken/ beefteak/ . e/ beverage drink/ ice tea/ coffee/ milk/ Work in fruit juice/ pairs - Role play: 1/ When/ you/ birthday party? When will you have your birthday party? 2/ Where/ you/ live? Where do you live? 3/ What time/ the party/ start(finish)?
postreading
* Write it up: write the invitation card Work in by yourself. individual homework - Do ex in the workbook Whole class (1 min) - Prepare new lesson at home V. Self - valuation ................................................................................................................. ........................ Preparing date: 19/9/2011 Teaching date: 23/9/2011 (6 mins)
UNIT3
Period13 I. Objectives - After finishing the lesson Ss will be able to know the bathroom and kitchen vocabulary and read and use them fluently with some exclamations. II.Contents: 1.Vocabulary : a bathroom, a kitchen, a sink, a washing machine, a diswasher, a dryer, a tub, a refrigerator. 2.Grammar: Exclamations -What a lovely house! IV.Teaching aids: Books, pictures, tape, catsette..... V.Teaching procedures: Stages/ste Contents Activities ps - Hang the picture about living room and Individual Warm up ask Ss talk the things in living room. 36 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
th
At home Lesson1: A - What a lovely home!(A.1,2 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Time:3
G/v : Nguyn Th
Ex: television, chair, picture, ....... *Brainstorming: chair table Radio Things of livingr oom
Clock Whole class
Shefl 1. Vocabulary. amazing delicious bright interesting, convenient comfortable, modern. a refregerator a bathroom a dishwash a kitchen a dryer a sink a washing machine <+>Checking: *Rubout and remember 2. Structures: What an awful day! What a lovely living room! <+>Set the sence.( A2 p 29,30 ) -Model sentences:
Presentati on Time:15
Practice: Time:15
What +a/an +Adj +N! 3. Word Cue drill Work In a> Kitchen/ amazing group S1: The kitchen is amazing. S2: What an amazing kitchen! b> archairs/ comfortable c> living room/ bright d> dinner/dilicious e> story/ interesting Picture of the kitchen. - Have Ss listen to the dialogue twice. - Have them answer the questions ( a...... 37 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
Productio n:
Time:7
d ) a.Which room does Lan and Hoa talk about ? b.Why does Lan like Hoa's room? c.What is in the bathroom ? d. What is in the kitchen room? - Let them check their answers ( Deliberate Mistakes ) Picture of the kitchen p .30 ( ? Ss look at the picture and check 4. Mapped dialogue: Work in pairs S1 S2 Example exchange This .... house S1 : This is my house .... beautiful... S2 : What a beautiful house And this...bedroom S1:And this is my bedroom. It...nice.Where....k itchen? S2:Its nice. Wheres the kitchen? It...over there. S1: Its over there. Oh!....modern....! S2:Oh! What a modern kitchen! This is the picture of a kitchen. the television is next to the refrigerator. There 's a washing machine between the diswasher and the electric stove. There 's a dining table with 5 chairs. Beside the washing machine is the tub.
- Answer key diswasher, sink, dryer. Making complaints with " What + a/ an + adj + noun !" Homework - Ask students to revise and remember Whole class Time: 3 all the structures they have learned in 38 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
the lesson . -Prepare for the next lesson by pre-read the new words. -Ask Ss to do exercises (1) in the workbook. Learn the new words or phrases and structures by heart. V. Self - valuation: ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................................
39 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT:3
th
At home
Period14 Lesson2: A - What a lovely home!(A.2) I. Objectives: After finishing the lesson Ss will be able to give compliments with exclamations to talk about the house. Making complaints with :" What + a/ an + adj + noun !" II.Language Contents: 1Vocabulary: delicious, , interesting ,awful, expensive, bad, boring, wet. 2.Grammar: Use: There is.... There are ...... III.Teaching aids: Books, pictures, .... IV.Teaching procedures: Stages/step Contents Activities s * Jumbled words Individual Warm up 1- tghirh = bright 2-teiinrgesn = Time:3 interesting 3-leoudici =dilicious 4-dogo = good 5tieaufubl = beautiful 6-lelovy = lovely 1. Vocabulary - awful, - expensive, - bad, -boring, - wet. -delicious , - comfortable -interesting *Checking: Rubout and remember 2. Review (exclamations) What + a/ an + adj + noun !" (A2 - p 30, 31) a. What an awful restaurant! ............................................ 3. Mapped dialogue This .... house 40 - Work in whole class
Presentatio n Time:15
Practice: Time:15 English 7 2011-2012
-Work in pair Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn ....
G/v : Nguyn Th
beautiful... and this ... bed room It 's nice S1: This is my house S2: What a nice house! S1 Where ... kitchen S2 It............ over there S1 Oh!......... modern............! Example exchange: Ss put the words from the box in the right column. armchair, living room, kitchen, bedroom, bathroom, washing machine, dryer, refrigerator, dishwasher, electric stove, picture, telephone, computer, television, sink,tub, shower, closet, table. <+>Practice: I have these things have these in my house my house I don't things in
Individual
Production Time:7 English 7 2011-2012
Presentation: use the picture on page 30. Look at the picture. Then practice with a partner <+>Model Sentences What an expensive dress! *Word cue drill : --Example exchange: Dress /expensive S1 The dress is expensive. restaurant/ awful S2 : Yes. What an expensive dress! day/ wet/ movie/ boring. * Survey : Ss give compliments or make 41
Work in group Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
complaints with '' What a/ an + adj + noun " Example exchange: S1: The dinner is dilicious S2 : Yes. What a dilicious dinner! Noughts and crosses: dinner movie restaurant boy shirt room girl house party Homework - Ask students to revise and Whole class Time: 3 remember all the structures they have learned in the lesson . -Prepare for the next lesson by preread the new words. -Ask Ss to do exercises (2 ,3) in the workbook. Learn the new words or phrases and structures by heart. V. Self - valuation : ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ......................................................... Preparing date: 26/9/2011 Teaching date: 30/9/2010
UNIT3:
At home
Period15th Lesson3: B - Hoas family (B.1) I. Objectives After finishing lesson Ss will be able to read the text for main ideas, details and job vocabulary. II.Language Contents: 1. Vocabulary : ( to )- raise, take care of, ( n ) - cattle, a journalist a newspaper. 2. Structures: Review - Present simple tense III.Teaching aids: Books, pictures, tape, catsette, extra board.... IV.Teaching procedures: Stages/step Content Activities s 42 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Warm up Time:3 *Networks : farmer Job journalist
G/v : Nguyn Th Individual worker
PreReading Time:15
1. Vocabulary: -( to ) raise : nui -( to ) takecare of : chm sc - cattle : gia sc, gia cm -a journalist : nh bo -a newspaper : bo <->Checking: *Rubout and Remember 2. Matching ( B3 P35 ) ( use extra board ) A farmer writes for a newspaper A doctor work on the farm A journalist teaches in a school A teacher takes care of sick peiple. <-> Set the sence ( B1 - 33 ) 3. T/F statement prediction: a. Hoa's father is a worker . b. Her mother does the housework and helps on the farm c. Her sister is 10. d. Lan's father takes care of sick children. e. Her mother is a doctor. f. Her brother works on a farm. - ? Ss read the dialogue and check their prediction. - Teacher gives answer key. Comprehention questions ( p33,34 ) Teacher asks Ss to do: 4. Noughts and crosses 43
- Work in whole class
-Work in pairs
Whilereading Time:15
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Postreading Time:7 Homework Time: 3
Questions from" a" to " f " in the book. g. What does Lan's father do ? h. Does Her mother teach at a school? i. What is her brother's job? * Write it up ( write about your family : - Individual member, age, job, place of work ) - Ask students to revise and - Whole class remember all the structures to talk about job that they have learned in the lesson . - Learn the new words or phrases and structures by heart. - Prepare for the next lesson by preread the new words. - Ask Ss to do exercises (B-1) in the workbook.
V. Self valuation : ............................................................................. .............................................................................................. .............................................................................................. .............................................................................................. ................................................................
Preparing date:28/9/2011 44 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Teaching date: 3/10/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 3 : AT HOME th Period 16 Part B - Hoas family (B.2,3,4) I . Objectives : By the end of the lesson ss will be able to - Give personal information. - Know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order to - Know the information then complete the forms. II . Language contents: 1.Vocabulary take care of, a high school, a magazine, cattle, a journalist a newspaper. 2. Grammar Review : the present simple tense. Skill : Listening. III . Teaching aids: - English 7 text book, picture, tape, cassette, extra board, cards IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities
Warm Up
(5 mins)
* Pelmanism : - T sticks the cards with number on oneside and job vocab., the places where they work a a a a farmer doctor teacher journali st works works teaches writes on in in for a a farm a a newspa hospital school per * Set the scene: 1.Vocabulary: -a high school (n) :trng Trung hc - a magazine (n): tp ch (examplereal object) -a journalist a newspaper. 45
- Ss can only see the number they choose and guess the match of words - record
Prelistening:
(15 mins)
- Work in individual and work in pair Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn * Pre questions - What are their names? - How old are they? - What do they do? - Where do they do? - Where do they work? *Open prediction (extra board) - Ask Ss to look at the form in the books. - Have Ss guess the information of three people. Name Age job Place of work
G/v : Nguyn Th
Whilelistening:
(15 mins)
Tom Susan Bill - Call on some groups to give their predictions. - Have Ss listen to the tape twice and check their predictions - Ask Ss to fill in the forms. - Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check. - Correct and give the correct answers: Listen Tom is a teacher. He is 26 years old and teaches at a high school. Susan is a journalist. She is 19 and write for a magazine. Bill is 20 and he is a nure. He works in a hospital *Answer key : Name Tom Susan Age 26 19 job teach er jornali st 46 Place of work at a highschool for a magazine
Ss work in groups , listen to the passage and check their prediction
-Work in pair
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Bill 20 nurse
G/v : Nguyn Th
PostListening
(8 mins)
in a hospital * Write it up ( about your family : member, age, job, place of work ) Recall. Ss use the grid to talk about Tom, Susan, and bill. Example: Tom is 26 years old. He is a teacher. He works at a high school.
Individual
Homework
(2 mins)
- Ask students to revise and Whole class remember all the structures they have learned in the lesson . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Prepare part B5,6 V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................. .................. .................................................................................... Preparing date:29/9/2011 Teaching date:5/10/2011
Unit 3 : AT HOME Period 17th: Part B - Hoas Family ( B5,6) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the life. II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Apartment - Furnished - Advice - Suitable - Empty - Good=> better => the best 2. Grammar: Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 - S + tobe + the most + adj. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. 47 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn IV. Teaching Procedures: Stages Content Warm up * Guessing Game. (5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Guess the jobs. + You go to this person when you have a toothache. + This person writes for a newspaper or magazine. + Before a house is built , this person draws the plan for it. + This person grows vegetables and raises cattle. - Remark and give marks.
Presentation
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activity - Greetings. - Play a game: + Dentist. + Journalist + Architect + Farmer
(15 mins)
Practice
(15 mins)
1. Vocabulary - Introduce the content of the lesson to Ss . - Explain some new words: + Apartment (n)= Flat . + Advice (n) : + Empty (adj) >< Full + Furnished ( adj) : + Suitable (adj) : + Good => better=> the best 2. Structures: + Comparatives of long adjectives S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 EX: She is more beautiful than her sister. + Superlatives of long adjectives: S + tobe + the most + adj . EX: He is the most intelligent. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the 48
- Write new lesson. - Listen. - Listen and write. - Guess the meanings . - Read in chorus and individually.
- Make sentences. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Find the answers . - Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering. - Listen and copy.
Production
(8 mins)
dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. 3. Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers for the questions. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct and give the answer key: a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79 c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27. The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the newest of the three apartments. It has two bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen. 4. Gap-filling - Introduce the situation of the lesson. - Ask Ss to read the letter . - Have Ss use the given words in the box in order to complete the letter. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed letter aloud. - Correct and give the correct answer. - Ask Ss to copy the letter in the notebooks. - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read . - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Have Ss make sentences with 49
- Listen. - Read the letter. - Complete the letter. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Read the letter aloud. - Copy the letter in the notebooks. - Read . - Make sentences.
Homework
(1 min)
- Whole class
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
them. - Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them. - Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Prepare language focus 1. V. Self-valuation : ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................... ...............................................................***.......................... ..........................................
50 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 18th: Language focus 1 I. Objectives: Ss do exercises in order to review the structures and grammar which they have been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and apply them in the life. II. Language content: - Present simple tense. - Future simple tense. - Ordinal numbers. - Comparatives and superlatives. - Prepositions of place. - Occupations. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, extra board. IV.Teaching Procedures: Stage Content Activity
Preparing date:01/10/2011 Teaching date:07/10/2011
51 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc

Warm up
G/v : Nguyn Th
(5 mins)
* Chatting - Ask Ss some questions about their health, families. I. Consolidation and practice 1. Present simple tense - Ask Ss to repeat the use of the present simple tense. - Ask them to do exercise 1: Complete the passage using the verbs in brackets. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Correct and give the correct answers. * Answer keys a. is / lives / are / goes b. are / eat / rides / catches 2. Future simple tense: - Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses Go post office Call Ba Read book Tidy yard Watch TV See movie
- Greetings. - Answer Ts questions. - Repeat aloud. - Do exercise. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Read aloud.
Review & Practice
(30 mins)
- Play a game. Make sentences.
EX: He will go to the post office. He wont call Ba. - Remark. 3. Ordinal numbers - Ask Ss to write the correct ordinal numbers. - Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write. - Correct if necessary. 52 English 7 2011-2012
- Write ordinal numbers. Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Go to the board and write. - Look at the pictures carefully and write. - Speak aloud. - Copy.
4. Prepositions: - Have Ss look at the pictures in the book and use the prepositions in the box to write the positions of the cat. - Call on some Ss to speak aloud. - Correct and give the correct answers * Answer keys a. Its in front of the chair. c. Its behind the TV. d. Its next to the bookshelf. e. Its on the couch. 5. Adjectives - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and use the adjectives in the box to make sentences about comparatives and superlatives. - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down. - Correct and give the correct answers: * Answer keys a) A is a cheap toy. B is cheaper. C is the cheapest. b) A is an expensive dress. B is more expensive. C is the most expensive. ...... 6.Occupations - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers. 1. LN 2. He fights fires. He is very brave. What is his job? 3. She works in a school. She teaches students. what is her job? 4. He lives in the countryside. He grows vegetables and raises cattle. Whats his job? 5. LN. 6. She works in a hospital. She makes 53 English 7 2011-2012
- Make sentences. - Go to the board and write. - Copy down.
- Play a game in 2 groups. - Complete the sentences. - Work in pairs.
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Production
(6 mins)
Homework
(1 min)
people well. Whats her job? 7. He works in a factory. He repairs machines . Whats his job? 8. LN 7. Is there a......?/ Are there any.....? - Have Ss look at the picture then complete the sentences. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct if necessary. - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks. 8. Question words - Ask Ss to look at the form then ask and answer the information about Pham Trung Hung. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct and ask them to write down.
- Practice in front of the class. - Copy down.
- Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering. - Whole class
- Do test yourself in workbook. - Review for the test. V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................
54 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Preparing date : 6/10/2011 Teaching date: 10/10/2011 Period 19th: English written test I. Objectives: The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will know each student and classs knowledge and have the method to teach. II. Language focus - Future simple tense - Present simple tense - present progressive tense - Exclamation - Wh questions - Strucrures - Vocabulary about school, class, student III. Preparing : - Teacher : prepare a written test - Students: Review III. Test IV Ma trn Ch Nhn bit Thng hiu Vn dng Tng TN TL TN TL TN TL I.Reading 5 5 2, 2 5 ,5 II.Languag 10 5 5 20 e focus 2 1, 1, 5 ,5 25 25 III. Writing 5 5 2, 2,5 55 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Tng 10 2,5 10 2, 5 10
G/v : Nguyn Th 5 30 5 10
Questions I. Pronunciation Question: Choose one word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others 1. A.great B.beautiful C.teacher D.means 2. A.wet B.better C.rest D.pretty 3. A.small B.face C.day D.late 4. A.horrible B.hour C.house D.here 5. A. stove B. moment C. sometimes D. close II. LANGUAGE FOCUS: Question 1: Supply the correct verb forms 1.Our children usually (play)............................................sports. They (play)............................. soccer at the moment. 2.Id like (join).........................................your club. 3.Lan and Mai (see).....................................a movie nest Sunday. 4. Your friends ( come ) here soon? Question 2: Choose the best answer A,B,C or D for each sentences 1. ...............is it from the hospital to the bus stop? A. How far B. How often C.Where D. How 2. Her..............................name is Thi A. family B. full C. middle D. last 3. A doctor takes care.................... sick people. A. for B. of C. to D. in 4. My parents ...........................on the farm. A. works B. to work C. work D. working 5. I...............................for an apartment in HaNoi next week. A. am looking B. look C. will look D. to look 6. Which is the...........................house? 56 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
A. better B. best C. most D. more 7. .........................................an intelligent boy! A. When B. How C. Where D. What Question 3: Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in standard English and correct them 1.My telephone number are 3853211. A B C D 2. I hope you come and join the fun. A B C D 3. Hoa is worried because she does not have any friend. A B C D III. READING: Read and then answer the questions This is Nam.He lives in a house in the City. Near his house, there is a hospital, a market and a post office. He is a student. He studies at LeVan Tam school.His house is not far from his school so he walks to school. He goes to school in the afternoon.There is a park opposite his school.There are a lot of big trees and beautiful flowers in the park . After classes he and his friends often play in the park. Questions: a. Check True or false statements True/ False 1. Nam lives far away from his school ......................... 2. There is a market near his house ......................... 3. He and his friends often play soccer after school ......................... b. Answer questions 4. How does he go to school? ->.............................................................................. 5. Is his school near the park? ->............................................................................... III.WRITING: Use the suggested words to make meaningful sentences. 1. This / Hoas / family / Hue >.............................................................................................................. .......... 2. father / a / farmer / so / her / mother >.............................................................................................................. ......... 3. They / vegetables / and raise / cattles 57 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
>.............................................................................................................. ......... 4. Hoa / living / her uncle / aunt / Hanoi / at the moment >.............................................................................................................. .............. 5. Hoa / unhappy/ she / misses / parents / her / friends
58 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 20: CORRECTING THE English written test I. Objectives: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English. II. Teaching aids : Test papers, chalk, board. III. Procedure: 1. Warm up : - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions . 2. Correcting the test: a) Remark the good and bad of the test and correct common mistakes. b) Deliver the test papers and give the correct answers:
Preparing date : 10/10/2011 Teaching date: 12/10/2011
Keys
I. Pronunciation Question: Choose one word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others 1.A 2.D 3.A 4.B. 5.C II. LANGUAGE FOCUS: Question 1: Supply the correct verb forms 1. play / are playing 2. to join 3. will see 4. Will...... come ? Question 2: Choose the best answer A,B,C or D for each sentences 1. A. 2. C. 3. B. 4. C. 5 A 6. A. 7. D Question 3: Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in standard English and correct them 1. D -> is 2. B -> will come 3. D -> any friends III. READING: 59 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Read and then answer the questions 1. False 2. True 3. False 4. He walk to school 5. yes, it is III.WRITING: Use the suggested words to make meaningful sentences. 1. This is Hoas family in Hue 2. Her father is a farmer so is her mother 3. They grow vegetables and raise cattles 4. Hoa is living with her uncle and aunt in Hanoi at the moment 5. Hoa is unhappybecause she misses her parents and her friends 4. Homework: Prepare unit 4 A1,2,3
60 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 4 : Period 21: I. Objectives: The students will review the way of speaking the time and some subjects at school. Ss will practice listening for details about subjects and time. II. Language content: Review : - The simple present tense. - Vocabulary about subjects at school. III. Teaching aids : Textbook, tape, cassette, clock, extra board. IV. Teaching Procedures: Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up *Noughs and crosses: - Greetings. ( 5 mins) Example exchange: - Play a S1: What time is it? game in 2 S2: It is seven oclock. groups. 7.00 4.45 1.20 8.30 10.20 3.40 9.50 6.15 11.55 - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game. Presentati on English 7 2011-2012 1. Vocabulary: Schedules: Lch trnh 61 Nm hc
Preparing date: 10/10/2011 Teaching date: 14/10/2011 AT SCHOOL Lesson 1: A Schedules ( A1,2,3 )
- Write new
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn ( 15 mins) Physics: Mn vt l Physical education: Mn th dc Finish: Kt thc Start: Bt u Check: *slap the board. sched ules physic s
G/v : Nguyn Th lesson.
start physic al educa tion
finish
2. Model sentences: - Ask Ss the questions about asking the time. -What time is it? -> It is + time ->Gi ng: It is + time + oclock ->Gi hn: It is +s gi + Past + s pht ->Gi km: It is +s pht + to + s gi EX: -6.00: It is six oclock Physical -6.10: It is ten pastfinis six educatio -6.35: It is thirty five to six h n Ss to practice listening and repeat -Ask in A1 P.42 S1: What time is it? S2: It is four fifteen It is fifteen past four. Practice ( 15 mins) - Ask Ss to repeat the questions about asking the time. - Have Ss look at the clocks in the book. - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to 62 English 7 2011-2012
- Look at the clocks in the book.
- Listen to the tape. - Read after the tape. Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Read aloud. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Listen . - Practice in front of the class. - Exchange the results.
the tape. - Have Ss read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ( exchange the roles) -Ask Ss answer the questions A2 - p 42 a)What time do you get up? ->I get up at 6.00 oclock. b)What time do classes start? ->Classes start at 7.15 . c)What time do they finish? ->They finish at 11.30. d)What time do you have lunch? ->I have lunch at 12.00 e)What time do you go to bed? ->I go to bed at 22.00. - remark. * Answer about you. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about them. - Make model with a student: T: What time do you get up? S : I get up at 6 oclock. T: What time do classes start? S : They start at 7 o clock. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Remark and ask them to write the answers in the notebooks. Production ( 8 mins) <+>Listening: A3.P43 -Teacher reads the tape three times. ? Ss listen and check their predictions Teacher gives the answer key *Answer key: Fri : 7.00 7.50 8.40 9.40 10.30 63 English 7 2011-2012
-Work in pairs - Give the answer.
- Listen and write. - Work in pairs.
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Math Eng Music Hisoty Physics Sat : 1.00 2.40 3.40 4.30 Phy-e Math Eng Physics
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Practice in front of the class. - Speak aloud.
Homework ( 2 mins)
*Retell the schedules: On Friday: They have English at 7.00, Geography at7.50...... On saturday: They have Physical education at 1.00....... -Ask Ss learn new words -Prepare new lesson.
Write homework
V. Self-valuation : ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ............................
Preparing date : 15/10/2011 Teaching date:17/10/2011 Period 22 : English 7 2011-2012

nd
UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL Lesson 2: A Schedules ( A4,5) 64 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak to each other about the schedule and practice the present continuous tense. II. Language content: - Review: + Vocabulary about subjects at school. + The present continuous tense III. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Networks (5 mins) - Have Ss play a game: Networks - Play a game in 2 groups.
Subject s
- Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write down. - Remark.
Presentation
(15 mins)
1. Vocabulary Time table : Thi kho biu interesting : Th v important : quan trng difficult : kh khn - Read newwords and ask Ss to repeat in chorus and in individual * Check : Slap the board 2. Structures - Make model with a student T : What is lan studying ? S : She is studyng physics T : What time does Lan/she have her physics class ? S : She has her physics class at 8:40 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class 65
- Go to the board and write.
- Listen carefully - Repeat in chorus and in individual
- Practice in front of the class - Write down. Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Correct if necessary - Ask Ss to write into the notebooks. Teacher introduces the situation of the passage and the requestion the exercise. <+>Model sentences: -What +to be + S + V-ing? ->S +to be + V-ing. *Pictures drill A4 p 43. - Have Ss look at the clocks and tell the time - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about these people Example exchange S1: What is Lan studying? S2: Lan is studying Physics. S1: What time does Lan have her physics class? S2: At 8.40. *Mapped dialogue: You : What time is it? your friend: It's 9.20. You : What do you have math? Your friend: 9.30 ................................... You your friend What time........? 9.20 What time/ math? 9.30 <+>Listen and read: (A 5- page) -T introduces the dialogue ? Ss guess: Hoa and Thu learn in a week. 66 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Practice
(15 mins)
- Look at the picture crafully - Speaks about the pictures
- Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Answer the questions.
- Look at the books and
G/v : Nguyn Th listen to the tape. - Give the answers. - Listen.
Production
(5 mins)
Homework
Have Ss listen to the tape twice and check their predictions. T corrects and gives the answer key Answer key: 1. English 2.Math 3. Geo 4 Phy-ed 5. Music <+>Comprehension questions: Answer key a. When does Thu have English subjects? -> On Wednesday and Thurs b. What time do they start? -> On Wed at 8.40...... c. What subjects does Thu have on Thur? -> Math, Geo, Phy-ed, Physic. d. What is Thus favorite subject? Why? ->Her favorite subject is Math because its difficult but fun. * Discussion ? Ss write their schedules ? Ss work in pairs to ask and answer about their schedules. When do we have.? What is your favorite subject? - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about their schedule - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes - Learn by heart new words and structures. - Write the schdules in the exercise book. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 22& 23 in workbook. 67
1 min)
- Write schedules in the notebook. - Work in pairs. - Practice speaking in front of the class.
- Listen carefully. - Write homework.
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
V.Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ---------------------------------------------------------------
Preparing date : 16/10/2011 Teaching date: 19/10/2011 UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL rd Period 23 : Lesson 3: A Schedules ( A6,7) I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to speak about the difference between two persons or two things. The students will know about the difference betweet schools in the USA and Viet Nam. Practice reading skill II. Language contents : 1. Vocabulary: - Uniform (n) - A 20-minute break (n) - Cafeteria (n) - Snack (n) - Popular (adj) - After - school activity (n) 2. Grammar Structure : Tobe different form. Reciew: the present simple tense III. Teaching aids : Text book ,extra board 68 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages Contents Warm up * Chatting (5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions + How many classes do you have today ? + What are they ? + What s your favorite subject ? + When do you have English ? + What time do they start ? Remark and give marks
Pre Reading
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activities - Answer Ts questions
(15 mins)
*Set the scene - Ask Ss some questions in order to load in new lesson : + Which country has capital city as Washington DC ? + What do you think about the USA? Today we ll learn about schools in the USA , before reading the text I ll explain some new words for you 1. Vocabulary + School uniform (n) : ng phc + A_20_minute break : Gi gii lao 20 + Cafetesia (n) : Qun n t phc v + Snack (n) : Mn n nh + Popular (adj) >< unpopular + After_school activity : Hot ng sau gi hc * Checking technique: Rub out and remember - Have Ss do exercise : 2.Open prediction: Vietnamese school American school Start End School uniform: Lunch at school: 69
- Write new lesson - Answer Ts question - USA
- Listen carefully - Read new words in churs and individually - Play a game - Do exercise in groups - Give the prediction
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
While reading
(15 mins)
3.True or False ( in the text book ) < using extra board> - Ask Ss to guess the information - Call on some represintatives to give their predicitions in front of the class - Ask Ss to look at the text and listen to the tape their check their predictions - Call on some Ss to give their answers -T corrects the answers *Answer key: Vietnamese school American school Start : 7.00 8.30 End: 11.00 3.30 or 4.00 School uniform: Yes No Lunch at school: No Yes *True/ false questions: T F a.T Ss do not usually wear school unform. b.F There are classes on saturday morning. c.F Ss dont have a break in the afternoon . d.T The school cafeteria sell food to Ss . e.T The school cafeteria only opens at lunch. f.F Basketball is an unpopular afterschool activity - Ask Ss to discuss in groups about the difference between shools in the USA and school in Vnam - Call on some represontatives to demonstrate their ideas 70 - Listen to the tape & check the prediction - Give the answers - Copy down - Read the text aloud - Work in groups Demonstrat e their ideas - Read after the tape - Read loudly - Listen and remember
Post reading
(9 mins)
Work in groups
Homework
(1 min) English 7 2011-2012
- Read after Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th the tape - Read loudly - Listen and remember
- Summarize the ideas of the groups - Remark *Play with words - Play the tape for Ss - Explain some new words + Home economics + The word changes + Rivers and mountains ranges + Several - Play the tape - Call on some Ss to read after the tape - Call on some Ss to read aloud - Repeat the details about the schools in the USA and VN
- Write home work
- Learn by heart new words & structure by making sentences with them - Make sentences with the part remember. - Do exercise 4 at page 23 in workbook - Prepare B1,2. V.Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ---------------------------------------------------------------
71 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 4 : Period 24th : I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positions II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rack (n) - Shelf (n) Shelves - Science books (n) - Dictionary (n) - Chemistry (n) - Biology (n) - Literature in Viet names(n) - Reader(n) - Reference book (n) - Novel (n) - At the back of (pre) 2. Grammar : The structure : - Where can I find the math books, please? - Do you have newspapers and magazines here? Review : The present simple tense : III. Teaching aids Text book, pictures. IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages & Time Contents Activities Warm up *Jumbled words - Play a ( 6 mins ) - Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words game Luratitere Hisplesc Torishy Bhygrageo - Work in Spenawpes groups - Have students work in groups - 2 students - Call on 2 representatives to go to the go to the 72 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 17/10/2011 Teaching date: 21/10/2011 At school Lesson 4 : B- The library <B1,2>
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn board and write down - Correct & remark
Presentation
G/v : Nguyn Th board & write
( 15 mins )
* Set the scene - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess - Ask Ss some questions + What is it in the picture ? + Where do you usually see it ? Load in new lesson + Does your school have the library ? + What do you usually do when you go to the library ? + Who can help you find the books in the library ? Explain some new words : 1. Vocabulary + Rack (n): Gi, k + Shelf (n) Shelves : Gi sch + Science books : Sch khoa hc + Dictionary (n) : t in + Novel : tiu thuyt + Reference books : Sch tham kho + At the back of : pha ng sau *Checking technique : *Slap the board - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then do exercise : 2. Grid : The library Openning time : Books on the left: Books on the right: Books in the English: Closing time: - Call on some Ss to go to the board and complete the table - Correct and give the correct answer - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue 73
- Look at the picture carefully - Listen and answer Yes, it does ( Ss can answer the questions in Vnamese ) - Guess their meanings, read new words in chours and individually - Copy down in their notebooks - Play game
Practice
( 15 mins )
- Look at the book and listen to the tape
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Production
in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to look at the questions in the books then work in pairs 3. Comprehension questions:( L.N) Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in front of the class - Correct the mistake if necessary *Answer questions: P.48 1. a)The magazines are on the rack. 2. L.N 3. b)The newspapers are on the rack. 4. c)Math and Science books are on the left. 5. d)History and geography books, dictionaries and literature are on the right. 6. L.N 7. L.N 8. e) The books in English are at the back of the library. 9. L.N 10. f) The Library opens at 7a.m. 11. L.N 12. g) The library closes at 4.30p.m. 4. Open dialogue - Ask Ss to look at part B1 again then make the similar dialogue - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to make their dialogues in front of the class Ex : H : Good morning L : Good morning. Can I help you ? H : Yes , where can I find the books in English? L : They are at the back of the library H : Do you have math and biology books here? 74
- Complete the table
- Go to the board and write - Work in pairs - Read aloud - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loud
( 8 mins )
- Listen to the teacher - Listen and write down - Make
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th questions & answers - Work in pairs
Home work
( 1 min )
L : Yes, they have on the shelves on the left H : Thank you very much L : You are welcome. - Ask Ss to write sentences about their school library , using the library vocabulary - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class - Remark - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them - Do exercise 1,2 at page 24 in work book - Prepare part 3,4,5
- Some pairs make dialogues - Write about the school library - Read loudly
- Write home work V.Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ---------------------------------------------------------------
Preparing date:21/10/2011 Teaching date: 24/10/2011 Unit 4 : English 7 2011-2012
At school
75 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 25th : Lesson 5 : B- The library <B3,4> I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know the information about one of the worlds largest libraries through the text. They will review the prepositions of position and library vocabulary. II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary - To receive (v) - To contain (v) - Employee (n) - Congress (n) 2. Grammar : - The present simple tense. - Skill : Listening, reading. III. Teaching aids Text book, pictures if have IV. Teaching Procedures : Stage Content Activity Warm up *Noughts and Crosses ( 7 mins ) Science Reference Newspaper - Play game in 2 groups book books s ( Make questions Magazines Readers Biology and answers) books Novels History Dictionaries books - Make example : S1 : Where are the science books ? S2 : They are on the sheklves on the right - Remark and lead in new lesson
Presentation
( 12 mins )
1. Vocabulary - Introduce the lesson then explain some new words + To reccive (v) : Nhn + Comgress (n) : Quc hi + To contain (v) : bao gm + Employee (n) : nhn vin *Checking vocab : Rub out and remember 2. True/ False statements 76
Whole class - Listen to the teacher carefully - Listen and copy down - Guess meanings read new Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th words in chours and individually - Work in groups to predict
Practice
( 15 mins )
- Ask Ss to do exerise : T or F prediction 1. The library of Congress is in New york 2. It receives copies of all E books 3. There are over 100 million books in this library 4. The shelves are about 300 km long. 5. 5.000 people work in the library a. Listen : Where are they ? - Ask Ss to look at the chart in the library - Have Ss work in groups guessing the positions of the books in the library. - Call on some representatives to speak about the pisitions of books S1 : Where are E books ? S2 : They are on the shelves behind the librarians desk - Play the tape for Ss and ask them ti check their predictions <2times> - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class - Play the tape again and check the answer - Give the correct answer : 1. Study 2. Science + math 3: Geography 4 + 5 : Newspapers and magazines 6+7 : English 8, Librarians desk - Ask Ss to compare their predictions - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the positions of books - Correct the mistakes b. Read then answer - Ask some representatives to give their predictions 77
- Look at the chart carefully - Work in groups to discuss the positions - Work in pairs
- Work in groups to predict - Give the predictions - Read the text in silent and check the predictions - Give the answers - Read the text aloud - Read the Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th text and find the answers - Play a game in groups answer the questions
- Ask Ss to look at the text, read in silent then check their predictions - Call on some Ss to give the answer *Answer 1-F 2-F 3-T 4F 5 -T - Call on some students read the text in front of the class - Correct their pronunciations - Ask Ss to look at the text again then find out the answers for the question - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers < The questions in the book > 1d 4b 2 - Ln 5 LN 3e 6a 7c
Production
- Write the answers - Compare 2 librarys - Write down - Listen - Read after the teacher - Listen and write down
( 9 mins )
- Ask Ss to write the answers in their notebooks * Discussion - Ask Ss to compare their school library with the library of Conguss - Ask them to write the sentences Ex : My school library in smaller than the library of Congress - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the teacher - Ask Ss to read after the teacher - Explain some new words : + To forget (v) : + Rocket (n) : + Space (n) : + Adveture (n) : - Call on some Ss to read the poem aloud - Correct their pronunciation 78
- Read aloud. - Listen carefully and make sentences.
Home work
( 2 mins )
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Ask Ss look at the remember and use the phrases of prepositions and pronouns to make sentences. - Learn by herart new works by writing 3 lines for each - Do exercise 4 at page 26 in work book Whole class - Prepare Unit 5 part A1,2. - Write home work V.Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ --------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 5 : Period 26th I. Objectives After the lesson, the students will be able to describe the work of a student at school . They use the present simple tense to talk about school subject II. Language contents 1. Vocabulary : - To learn about - To use how to use - To be interested in - A map (n) - An experiment (n) - Computer science (n) 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense. III. Teaching aids 79 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date:23/10/2011 Teaching date: 26/10/2011 Work and play Lesson 1 : A - In class ( A1)
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Text book , pictures IV. Procedure Stages Warm * up : Network ( 7 mins )
G/v : Nguyn Th
Contents Physic Literature
Activities Work in groups
Mat h Englis h
Subjects
Geograp hy Histor y
Music
Presentat Listen and read: ion 1. Vocabulary ( 15 mins ) - Introduce the lesson,then explain some new words +to learn about (v): hc v +to use how to use : cch s dng +computer science(n):tin hc +to be interested in : say m +A map(n): bn + An experiment: th nghim * Checking vocab: What and where 2. Model sontences - What do you study in your geography class? I study about .................. - What is her favorite subject? It is.................... Practice - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen ( 17 mins ) to the tape(2 times) - Have Ss read the text in silent - Call on some students to read the text 80 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen carefully - Guess meanings,re ad new words in chorus and individually,t hen copy down in the notebooks - Play game Listen and copy down - Look at the books and listen to the tape Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Read in silent - Read the text aloud - Complete the grids - Do individually - Exchange the results - One students go to the board and writes - Write down - Read aloud - make questions & answer - Work in pairs - Practice in front of the class
aloud - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the text again then fill in the grids - Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners - Call on one student to go to the board and write down - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer + To learn how to use a computer + To study maps and learn how about different countries + To do some experiments - Have Ss read the question and answer in the book - Ask Ss to make 5 questions and answers about Mai - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary 3. Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about themselves,using the questions given 1)What time do your class start? 2) What do you learn at school? 3) What do you do in your computer science class? 4) What do you study in your geography class? 5) What do you do in your last lesson? 6)What time do your classes end? - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Ask Ss to based on the questions to write a passage - Call on some student to read their writing 81 English 7 2011-2012
- Work in pairs - Practice aloud
- Write a passage Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn aloud - Remark *Discusssion: ? Ss answer th questions about their classes. a.what time do your classes begin? b.What do you leanr at school? c.What do you do in the Geography class? d.What time do your classes end?
G/v : Nguyn Th - Read aloud Work in groups
Productio n ( 7 mins )
Homewor k (1 min )
- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 Whole class lines for each - write the passage in the notebooks - Do exercise 1,2 at page 27 in workbook - Prepare A3,4 V.Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ---------------------------------------------------------------
82 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 5 : Period 27th I. Objectives After the lesson, the students will be able to describe the work of a student at school and Bas activities at school and at home . They use the present simple tense to talk about school subject II. Language content 1. Vocabulary : - Electronics - To repair = to fix - Household appliances - Drawing. - Artist - To be good at 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense. III. Teaching aids Text book , pictures IV. Teaching Procedures Stages Contents Actyvities Warm up - Greetings - Greetings (5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions - Answer Ts + How many days a week do you go to questions school ? + What time do you go to school ? + What time do classes start ? + How many subjects do you learn ? + What is your favorite subject ? Remark then lead in new lesson Practice English 7 2011-2012 - Have Ss look at 2 pictures and answer 83 Nm hc - Look at the
Preparing date:24/10/2011 Teaching date: 28/10/2011 Work and play Lesson 2 : A - In class ( A2)
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th picture and answer the questions .Students can answer the questions in Vnamese if dont know - Guess the meanings read new words in chorus and individually - Then copy down - Play game
the questions This is Ba. What is he doing ? Introduce some new words : 1. Vocabulary + Electronics (n) : in t + House hold appliances : cc vt dng trong gia nh + To repair (v) : sa cha + To be good at : gii v. + Drawing (n) : bn v + Artist (n) : Ha s + To enjoy (v) : yu thch - Correct their pronunciation - Checking technique : Rub out and remember - Have Ss do exercise : T or F predicition 2. True and false predictions 1/ Ba enjoys his school very much 2/ His favorite subject is Electronics 3/ In this class he does some experiments 4/ He isnt good at fixing things 5/ He can help his parents at home 6/ He never goes to art club - Have Ss work in groups - Call on some representatives to give their predictions - Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions - Cal on some students to give the answers on front of the class - Correct and give the correct answers 1T 2T 3F 5T 6F - Call on some Ss to read text aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions - Cal on some students to give the answers on front of the class 84
Practice (17 mins)
- Work in groups - Give the prediction - Read the text & check the prediction - Give the answers in front of the class - Copy down - Read the text & check the prediction Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th - Give the answers in front of the class - Copy down - Read the text aloud - Read the text again to find out the answers - Work in pairs - Some pairs practice in front of the class - Copy down
- Correct and give the correct answers 1T 2T 3F 5T 6F - Call on some Ss to read text aloud - Correct their pronunciation 3. Comprehension Questions :(lucky numbers) - Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers for the questions - Have Ss work in two groups - Call on ss to choose questions and answer in front of the class - Correct and give th answer key a/ He likes Electionics best b/ Yes , he does. He enjoys school very much c/ He learns to repair house hold applicanes d/ LN e/ LN f/ He will able to fix his own appliances g/ LN h/ Yes , he is . His drawings are very good Production (7 mins) 4. Survey - Ask Ss to make a survey: Name Nam Hoa - Have Ss work in groups - Call on some representatives to tell about members of their group. - Make model : T : What do you do in your free time S : I play soccer T : What are you goot at ? 85 English 7 2011-2012 Favorite subject Good at Freetime activity
Make a survey.
Work in groups
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
S : I am good at drawing T : What is your favorite aubject ? S : My favorite subject is fine Arts - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary Homework (1 min) - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each - Write the passage in the notebooks - Do exercise 1,2 at page 27 in workbook - Prepare A3,4 - Write homework
V.Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................ ---------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 5 : Period 28th : I. Objectives By the end of the class, Ss will be able to do a math question and they will listen a passage to find out the information , speak about subjects at school, what they study in each subject. They continue pratising reading skill II. Language content 1. Vocabulary : 86 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 29/10/2011 Teaching date : 1/11/2011 Work and play Lesson 3 : In class (4,5,6)
G/v : Nguyn Th
- To cost (v ) - Right (adj ) - Problem - To erase (v) - Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n) 2. Grammar Review the present simple tense III. Teaching aids Textbook , cassette , tape , extra board IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages/steps Contents Activities *Matching: Warm up Individual Time:3 Work in group ? Ss match the pictures ( A4- page 54 ) and the subjects : a.Compute Science: Picture C b.Physical education: Picture B c.Geography: Picture A d.Electronics: Picture D e.Class activity: Picture E Pre listening: Time:15 1. Vocabulary + To cost (v) : tr gi + Right (adj) : ng + Price (n) : gi + Proplem (n) : vn + essay (n) + past and present events (n) + author (n) + To erase (v) : xa, ty + Graphs (n) + Equation (n) + Caculator (n) + Globe (n) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and invidually * Checking vocabulary : Matching 2. Prediction (listening) Listen then write correct letters next to names 87 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Whole class
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Introduce the aims of the lesson - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of sbject - Ask Ss to guess what subject Ba and Hoa do on Saturday ? - Call on some Ss to give then predictions -T introduces the situation of this excise and how to do it. - ? Ss predict what subjects Ba / Hoa has on Saturday morning. ( Ss can write name Ba or Hoa next to the pictures.) While listening: Time:15
Work in pairs
-? Ss listen to the tape and check -Individual their predictions. -? Ss compare their answers with each others. -? Ss read out their answers - T gives the answer key: Ba : d-a -e Hoa : c-b-e *Transformation speaking: Individual * Reading comprehension A5 Pre- reading: -T introduces the vocabulary. Pass : qu kh ( explanatuon) Present: hin ti ( explanation) An event: s kin ( explanation) An essay: bi vn ( realia) Calculator: my tnh ( realia) - Open prediction -? Ss look for the subjects appear in the text. While- reading: - T reads the text one time. - ?Ss read the text and check their prediction. - ?Ss answer some question about 88 Nm hc
Post listening: Time:7
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
the text. Comprehension questions: a. What do you study at school? b. What do you learn in literature? c. Do you study pass and present events in history? d.What subjects do you learn about the country and people? e. Do you speak English in languare class? f. What other things do you study? - T corrects and gives answer key. Literature : paintings Science : preposition History : baskestball English : England Post- reading ? Ss do excise 6* : Math each subject to the correct items: Answer: Physical Education: games, running shoes, ball Geography: map, globe, atlas Music: piano, guitar, songbooks Art: pait, pancils, paper Math: graphs, equations, calculator. ? Ss do excises in the workbook. Homework Time: 3 V. Self - valuation: ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................................................................................
89 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 5 : Period 29th : I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about activities at recess. They will practice reading and listening skills II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - To chat (v) - To ring (v) - To skip rope - Bell(n) - Blind mans bhaff - Marbles - Catch (n) - Recess 2. Grammar : Review : The present continuous tense : III. Teaching aids Textbook , tape , cassetter , pictures IV.Procedures Stages Warm up (5 mins ) Contents * Noughts and crosses - Have Ss play agame : Noughts and crosses Music History English Geography Literature Computer science 90 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Math Electronics Physics Activities - Play a game 2 groups take part in the game
Preparing date:30/10/2011 Teaching date:2/11/2011 Work and play Lesson 4 : B - Its time for recess (B1,2)
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn - Ask Ss to make questions and answers Ex : What do you learn in History class? We learn about past and present events .. Presenta - Ask Ss to look at the picture and tion answer the questions (15 mins) + Where are the students ? + What are they doing ? + Do you like these games ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape . - Explain some new words to Ss + Recess(n) + Bell (n) + Ring (v) + To chat (v) + To skip rope : + Blind mans bluff : + Marbles (n) : + Catch(n) : ( Use pictures to introduce new wordds ) - Checking technique : What and where - Remark 2. Revision of the present continues tense - Ask Ss to look at the picture again then work in pairs asking anf answering about activities - Make model S1 : What is this boy doing ? S2 : He is playing catch + What are these students doing ? They are talking - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if have 91 English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
.- Listen carefully
- Look at the picture carefully and answer Ts questions
- Listen - Guess the meanings read new words in chrous and individually then copy down
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn - Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks Practic e (17 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Have Ss listen to the tape again & look at the book - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud - Ask Ss to complete the list : Recess activities The most popular activity + meeting friends - Call on some Ss to complete the list 1.Ask and answer questions with a partner - Explain the aims of the x\exercise to Ss - Make model with a good student : + What do you usually do at recess ? + What do you usually do after school ? - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if have - Explain the aims of the lesson : Mai, Kien , Lan , Ba are at recess - Review activities at recess - Ask Ss to predict what activity each student is playing at recess. - Call on 2 Ss to give their predictions. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check the prediction. - Play the tape again for Ss to match. - Have Ss exchange the result with a partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers + Mai is playing catch 92
- Listen to the tape Play a game - Listen to the tape - Read the text aloud
Read the activities in the books - Predict. Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check. - Listen to the tape & match. - Exchange the result - Give the answers - Copy down
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn + Kien is playing blind mans bluff.. + Lan is skipping rape + Ba is playing marbles Prodution (7 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Explain the aims of the lesson : Mai, Kien , Lan , Ba are at recess - Review activities at recess - Ask Ss to predict what activity each student is playing at recess. - Call on 2 Ss to give their predictions. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check the prediction. - Play the tape again for Ss to match. - Have Ss exchange the result with a partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers Mai is playing cath. Kien is playing blindmans bluff. Lan is skipping rope. Ba is playing marbles. Tapescrip: It is recess and the yard is very crowed and noisy. Mai and Ba are playing catch. Kien is playing blindmans bluff with some friends.Ba is playing marbles and Lan is skipping rope. They are all having a good time.
Homework (1 min)
- Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them - Do exercise 1 at page 30 in workbook - Prepare part B3,4 V. Self valuation Preparing date: 1/11/2011 Teaching date: 4/11/2011 93 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 5 : Work and play th Period 30 : Lesson 5 : B - Its time for recess (B3,4,5) I. Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about activities at recess of American students. They continue practicing asking and answering about activities at recess II. Language content 1. Vocabulary - Pen pal (n) - Junior high school (n) - Energetic (adj) - To swap (v) - To score goal - Portable (adj) - Earphone (n) - To relax(v) 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense III.Teaching aids Textbook , sub_board , tape , cassette IV. Teaching procedures : Stages Warm up ( 5 mins ) Contents * Slap the board - Have Ss play a game : Skip rope Reces s Slap the board Activities - Greetings - Play game in 2 groups ( Each groups has 3 students to take part in the game ) - Write down
Play blin mans bluff Play catch Marbles Bell Ring
- Demonstrate the group which wins the game. Lead in new lesson - Ask Ss some questions about activities Presentatio at recess in VN and in orther continues n + What do Vnamese students often ( 15 mins ) do at recess ? + Do you know what students in other countries often do at recess? 94 English 7 2011-2012
- Answer Ts questions - Listen carefully
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Practice (15 mins)
( or in the USA) + What activities do you like ? 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss + Pen pal (n) : bn qua th + Junior hight school (n): trng THCS + Energetic (adj) : Nng n , hiu ng + To score goal : Ghi bn + Portable (adj): C th xch tay + Ear phones (n) : Tai nghe + To swap (v) : Trao i + To relax (v) : Th gin * Checking vocab : Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to guess what students in the USA often do at recess - Call on some Ss to give their opinions - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape in order to know exatly what American students often do at recess - Have Ss read the text and list the activities the American students often do at recess - Call on some students to give the answers - Correct if necessary - Call on some students to read the text in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation 2.Comprehension Questions : - Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers - Have Ss Exchange the result with their partners - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers a. Hoas penpal Tim goes to an American school b. A ( short ) 95
- Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down
- Play a game - Guess - Give the opinions - Look at the book and listen to the tape - Read the text and list the activities. - Give the answers - Read the text aloud - Read the text and find out the answers - Exchange the results - Give the answers
Production ( 9 mins )
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn c. D (mostly boys ) d. D (work wide >
G/v : Nguyn Th
3. Take a survey - Explain the aims of the leeson - Have Ss write the form of the survery in the notebooks - Introduce ask Ss to complete the table by asking friends some questions such as : What do you do at recess ? Do you play soccer / skiprape.? - Have Ss work in groups of three or four - Call on some representatives to tell about activities of their groups at necess Ex : At recess , Trang skips rope , Trung plays catch with other friends , and Hoa reads books. - Ask Ss to write full sentences in the Homework : notebooks ( 1 min ) - Call on some students to read their writings in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary <5> Play with words : - Play the tape for Ss - Ask Ss to look at the books and read after the tape - Call on some Ss to read aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Repeat the acivities of American students at recess - Names of activities at recess in Vietnam. 4. Home work : - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each - Do exercise 2 at pgae 31 - Prepare part A1 of Unit 6. V. Self valuation 96 English 7 2011-2012
- Work in groups - Tell about activities
- Write full sentences - Read aloud - Listen to the tape - Read after the tape - Read aloud - Listen
- Write home work
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------------------------------Preparing date: 04/11/2011 Unit 6 : After school st Period 31 : Lesson 1 : A - What do you to do ? (A1) I. Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about activities after school and give the invitation , the requests II. Language content 1. Vocabulary : - To invite (v) - To practice (v) - To come along - Together 2. Grammar: - Lets go to the cafeteria - Why dont you come along ? III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures IV. Procedures Stages Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents *Networks - Have Ss play a game: Networks - 2 groups take part in the game - Go to the board & write - Have Ss go to the board and write down - Demonstrate the group which miss the games 97 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Activities - Greetings - Play a game
Afterschool activities
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Lead the new lesson
G/v : Nguyn Th
Presentat - Ask Ss some questions such as: ion What do you often do after school ? ( 15 mins) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What are they doing ? - Have Ss listen to the tape - Explain some new words and structures + To invite (v) : mi + To practice (v) : luyn tp + To come along : i cng + Together : cng nhau + Lets /go to the cafeteria and get / a cold drink / invite him + Why dont you / come along ? / play soccer ? - Ask Ss to make sentences using the structures: Practice ( 15 mins) - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape again - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialougue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Answer : - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers then ask Ss to write down a. Shes doing her math home work b. They are going to get a cold drink in the caferia 98 English 7 2011-2012
- Answer Ts questions - Look at the pictures and answer: - Listen to the tape - Listen carefully - Read new words in chorus and individually then copy down
Make sentences - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Practice reading the dialogue - Read the dialogue and find the answers - Work in pairs - Practice asking and
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn c. Hes in the music room d. Heslearning to phay the guitar e. He usually meets his friends f. She likes playing volleyball Production - Have Ss play a game : ( 9 mins) Noughts and crosses Lan Minh You Do Watch Listen to home T.V music work Comput er games
G/v : Nguyn Th answering - Copy down
- Play a game Mai &Hoa Talk The girls Skip rope 2 groups make questions and answers with the cries
Model S1 : What is Lan doing ? S2 : She is doing her homework Home work - Write the answers in part A1 in the (1 min) notebook. - Make 5 questions with each structure - Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook - Prepare A2 V. Self valuation Write home work
.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................
-------------------------------------------------
99 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Preparing date : 05/11/2011 Teaching date : 09/11/2011 Unit 6: After school nd Period 32 : Lesson 2: A -What do you do? (A2) I-Objectives: After the lesson,Ss will be able to use adverbs of frequency with the present simple tense for after-school activities II-Language content: 1/Vocabulary: Revisionadverbs of frequency: Always,usually,sometimes,often,never 2/Grammar Review:the present simple tense III- Teaching aids Textbook,sub_board,pictures IV-Procedure Stage Content Activity Warm up: * Slap the board - Play a game (5 mins) - Have Ss review the old lesson by slap the playing a game called slap the board board - Read these words in Vietnamese - Slap in E +Swim words +Read book +Watch T.V - 2 groups +Play computer games take part in +Play soccer the game +Go to the movie - give the result and remark Presentati on: (15 mins) - Ask SS to look at the pictures in the books carefully - Have Ss call the names of the pictures - Call on someSs to give the answers - Correct and give the corect answers: 1/Reading/studying in the library 2/Swimming in the pool 100 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Look at the pictures carefully - Call the names of the pictures - Give the answers
G/v : Nguyn Th
3/Playing computer games 4/Going to a movie 5/Playing soccer 6/Watching T.V - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about the pictures - Make model What are these students doing? They are reading in the library Practice: (15 mins) -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class 3/Practice b/Ask Ss the questions What do you usually do after school? - Have Ss play a game: * Noughts and crosses Always Usually Usually Go Play soccer Watch T.V swimming Sometimes Often Often play Play tennis Play computer Sometimes computer games Do games Often homework Never Go to a Go to the movie library - Remarks - Ask Ss to use adverbs in the box to write a sentences for each day of the week - Have Ss Work in pairs asking and answering - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Remark and correct the mistakes Now ask and answer question,using How often.....? - Make example with a student + How often do you go to the library? 101 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
-Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering,using the pictures in the book - Call on some pairs to pratce in front of the class - Correct the mistake if have Production * Matching (9 mins) - Have Ss do exercise 5 at page 71 of Language focus - Give the information in the table and ask Ss to look at the table then matching : Activities Frequency Go cafeteria never Ride bicycle sometimes Practice guitar often Do home work usually Play computer games always - Call on some Ss to give the result - Correct the mistakes - Ask Ss to write about Ba, using the information Model : Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time.... - Call on 2 students to go to the board and wirte down - Remark and give marks Home work - Write a sentence for each day of the (1 min ) week , using the advends of frequency - Do exercise 2+3 at page 34 in work book - Prepare part 3,4,5 V. Self valuation 102 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Answer Ts questions - Work in pairs - Practice in front of the class - Do exercise 5 - Read the information in the table and match - Give the result - Write sentences about Ba - Go to the board and writes - Write homework
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ...... -------------------------------------------------
Unit 6 : After school th Period 34 : Lesson 3 : A - What do you do ? (3 ,4 ) I/ Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to read a text for details about pastime activities II/ Language content 1/ Vocabularycollection , reheare , To collect , an anmiversary celebration , president 103 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 07/11/2011 Teaching date : 11/11/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
2/ Grammar : Review _The present simple tense _The progresstive tense III/ Teaching aids Textbook , IV/ Procedure : Stages Contents Warm up Guessing game ( 7 mins ) - Have Ss play a game - Ask Ss to write pentences about the activity which they play after school Ex : I usually play soccer after school - Ask one student to go to the board and their friends guess - Remark
Activities - Play a game - Write sentences - Guess what their friends do after school - Look at the picture and guess - Give the prediction - Listen and write down - Guess meaning, read in chours and individually then copy down Play a game
Presentati on ( 17 mins )
* Set the scene - Have Ss look at the pictures and guess what the students are doing - Call on some students to give their prediction + Explain some new word : + Sporty (adj) + Comic (n) + a predident + an anmiversary celebration + To collect (v) + reheares (v) + a collection + collection (n) - Have Ss read new words in chours and individually * Checking vocab: What and where
- Have Ss do an exercise 104 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th Do this exercise in groups Work in groups Give the predictions
2. True or False prediction : 1. Nga, Ba and Nam are students in class 7 A 2. They like sprots very much 3. Ngas favorite pastime is jogging 4. Ba like collecting stamps 5. Nam plays soccer ecery afternoon 6. Nam usually watches T.V - Have Ss work in groups to give their predictions - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to look at the book and read in silent - Ask Ss correct the exercise - Correct then give the corret\ct answer 1T 3F 5F 2F 4T 6T
Read the passage loudly
Practice (15 mins)
Read in silent Correct the exercise Find out the answers - Ask Ss to look at the questions and Work in pairs read the passage again to find out the Practice answers asking and - Have Ss work in pairs answering - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in Copy down front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Her groups is rehearsaing a play for the school anniversary celebration Answer Ts b/ He gets American stamps from Liz , questions his American friend c/ The stamp collectors club meets on Wednesday afternoon d/ Nam never plays games - Ask Ss some more questions: 105 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th Listen carefully Read Give the prediction Listen to the tape Gice the results Check the answers Write down Listen to the tape Read after the tape Read aloud
+ What dows Nga bike doing after school ? + What do Ba and his friend often do on Wednesday afternoon ? + What do Ba and his friend often do after school hours ? <4> Listen Match each name to an activity - Introduce the aims of the exercise - Ask Ss to read the names and activities - Ask Ss to give their predictions - Have Ss listen to the tape (2 times ) - Call on some Ss to give the results - Play the tape again to check the answers Production - Correct and give the correct answer: ( 5 mins ) A Mai go to the school cafeteria B Nam rehearse a play C Ba go to the circers D Lan watch movie E Kien tidy the class room <5> Play with words : Have Ss listen to the tape Home work - Ask them to look at the books and read ( 1 min ) after the tape - Call on some Ss to read in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Repeat the activities after school hours - Ask Ss to write a paraguaph about after school activities, using matching - Remark - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 times for each - Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book V. Self valuation 106 English 7 2011-2012
Listen Write a paragraph Speak aloud Write home work
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. -------------------------------------------------
Unit 6 : After school th Period 34 : Lesson 4 : B - Lets go < B1 > I/ Objectives By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make/give suggestions and accept or refuse the suggestions II/ Language content 1/ Vocabulary : Assigament (n) Fun (adj) 2/ Structure : - Lets + V Yes, lets - What about + Ving ? Good idea / ok - Why dont / we Sorry, I cant / you III/ Teaching aids Text book , picture , extra board, tape , cassette IV/ Teaching Procedures Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Chatting (4 mins) - Ask Ss some questions about - Answer Ts themselves questions 107 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 11/11/2011 Teaching date :14/11/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th
+ What do you usually do after the school ? + Do you like playing soccer ? + Do you usually/ go to the movie ? / play games ? + How often do you go to the movie ? Pre reading - Remark (14 mins) * Set the scene: - Introduce the situation of the dialogue : Ba , Nam Lan and Hoa are discussing about / What they should do to relax / How they should relax 1. Vocabulary - Introduce some new words and structures: + Assignment (n) = home work + Fun (adj) 2. Suggestions : + Lets go to my house go to Lans house + Why dont you relax ? + What about going to the movie ? - Have Ss practice the dialogue in front of the class - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class While - Correct the pronunciation reading - Have Ss look at the picture and guess (18 mins) what activities they are talking - Call on some Ss to give their predictions - Play the tape for Ss (2 times ) - Call on one student to give the answer - Now answer : - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for questions - Have Ss work in pairs 108 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen carefully - Read in chours and individually. Write down. Make sentences with structures - Guess - Give the predictions - practice the dialogue in front of the class
Listen to the tape Give the answer Listen and write down Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Post reading (8 mins)
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class * Answer keys a/ Nam wants to go to the movies b/ Lan does nt want to go to the movies because there arent any good movies at the moment c/ Lan wants to listen to music at her house d/ Hoa does nt want to go to Lans house because she has too many assignments e/ Its Saturday - Practice - Have Ss practice , using given words : 1/ Lets / listen / music 2/ What / watch / movie 3/ Why / join us 4/ What / go / cafeteria 5/ Why / study / library Make model : S1 : Lets listen to some music S2 : Yes , lets good idea - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary
Practice in front of the class
Work in pairs Practice asking and answering aloud Copy down
Practice in pairs Practice in front of the class
* Mapped dialogue - Give a mapped dialogue then ask Ss to Listen & make a dialogue using given words & make a phrases dialogue You Your friend What..do..afternoo Movies n? Mais house, Not good movie take a bus Too far , not have a Ok bike Ok - Work in - Have Ss work in pairs 109 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th pairs - Practice in front of the class - Write down
- Call on some pairs to make a dialogue in front of the class - Correct the mistakes then give the Home work correct dialogue (1 min) S1 : What should we do this afternoon ? S2 : Lets go to the movies S1 : There isnt any good movie on S2 : What about going to Mais house ? We can play a game togerther S1 : But Its too far. I dont have a bike S2 : Why dont we take a bus ? S1 : OK - Make & sentences for each structures - Do exercise 1 at page 35 in work book - Prepare B2
- Write home work
V. Self valuation
.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. -------------------------------------------------
110 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 6 : After school th Period 36 : Lesson 5 : B - Lets go ! (B2) I/ Objectives After the lesson , Ss will be able to know a magazine survery about the most popular activities of American teenagees and ger further practice in leisure vocabulary II/ Language content 1. Vocabulary : : a teenager ,a musical instrument, a model ,a sccut ( boy scout ),a guide ( girl guide ) ,to attend 2. Grammar: Review : Simple Present tense. III / Teaching aids : Book, pictures IV/ Teaching Procedures : Stages Contents Warm up * Pelmanism (5 mins) - Have Ss play a game: Have 6 cards <1> What about <2> Why dont <3> Lets <4> Collect stamps <5> Going to the circus ? <6> You study in the library - Remark 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss + Teenager (n) : thiu nin + Musical mstrument (n) : Nhc c + Model (n) : mu + Scout (n) : Hng o sinh + Guide (n) : Ngi hng dn + Coin (n) : Tin xu + Organization (n) : T chc 111 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Activities - Play a game Pelmanis m 2 groups take part in the game
Pre reading (15 mins)
- Listen carefully - Guess meanings , read new words in
G/v : Nguyn Th chours and individually Copy down - List the activities - Predict - Give the prediction - Call the names of activities
* Checking vocab : Rub out and remember * Boy scout/ girl giude : T chc ny nhm rn luyn cho hi vin nhng k nng thc tin v xaydng nhn cch. 2. Open prediction: -? Ss predict what American teenagers like to do in their free time. - Ask Ss to list the activities that teenagess like to do in their free time - Ask Ss to predict what American (students) teenagers like to di in their free time - Call on some students to give then predictions - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and call the names of these activities Whilereading (15 mins) - Ask Ss to look at the book and read the text in silent - Have Ss give the names of activities - Ask them to compare with their predictions - Remark and call some students to read the text aloud 3. Comprehesion questions - Give some comprehension questions: a./ Which activities are the most popular for not only American teenagers but also Vietnamese Teenagers? ( watch TV / listen to music/ go to the movies/ help old people). b / Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in VN ? What are they ? c / What organizations are there for teenagers in VN d/ 112 English 7 2011-2012
- Read in silent - Give manes - Compare - read aloud - Answer - Give the answers - Work in groups - Make a list of the groups favorite leasure activities - Some groups read Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th aloud - Listen
*Discussion : - In groups of four. - Let the students think about the activities they take part in after school. - Choose the ten activities which they like best. - Work in - Teacher gives some suggestion : groups *Which of the activities in the list for American teenagers do you think are also popular among Viet nam teenagers? ( watchTV/ listen to music/ go to the movies/ help old people) * Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in viet nam? What are Homewo they? rk * What organizations are for teenagers (2 mins) in Viet nam? -? Some Ss read out the activities that they like best. - Teacher summaries all the popular activities that Viet nam Ss like to do after school. - Write home work - Learn by heart 10 most popular activities - Do exercise 2 at page 35 in work book - Prepare part 3,4 V. Self -valuation:
.............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................
- Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct the mistakes -?Ss read the text ( B2 -P.65 ) and check their prediction.
.........................***.................................. 113 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 6 : After school th Period 37 : Lesson 6 : B - Lets go ( B 3 ) I/ Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know + How to arrange the appointment + How to invite other, agree or disagree the invitation. + Listen and practice the dialogue II/ Language content 1/ Vocabulary wedding 2/ Structure : - Would you like to.......? Yes Id love to - Im not sure. Ill call you tomorrow. - Id love to, but I cant come. 114 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Thanks for inviting me. Its my pleasure. - Thanks anyway. Youre welcome. III/ Teaching aids Textbook , cassette and tape IV/ Teaching Procedures Stage Content ? Some Ss go to board and write ten Warm up (4 mins) activities that Viet nam Ss like best. - Teacher remark and gives the marks. Prelistening (15 mins) 1. Vocabulary wedding(n)( picture): l ci * Ask Ss some questions: + Do you usually use the invitations ? + In which occasions do you use these invitations + How do you accept or reguse the invitations ? - Teacher introduces the situations in the book. - Teacher introduces the structures * Would you like to........? * Why don't you .........? * What about............? * How about.......? Respond: * Yes, I'd love to. * I'm sorry, I' can't. * I'd love to, but.... * Word cue drill a. S1: go to the library. S2: That a good idea. b. S1: Watch soccer match on TV S2: Disagree/ do homework c. S1: Go to the circus S2: agree d. S1: play video games S2: disagree 115 English 7 2011-2012
Activity Whole class
-Write down -Answer Ts questions -Listen to the teacher -Write down
Work in pairs
-Make sentences
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Whilelistening (10 mins)
................................. Example Exchange: S1: Would you like to go to the library? S2: agree -Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape (twice ) -Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue -Call on some pairs to role play the dialogue in front of the class -Correct their pronunciation -Have Ss based on the dialogue to make similar dialogue -Have Ss work in pairs -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class -Correct the mistakes for Ss
-Listen to the tape -Work in pairs Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class -Make similar dialogue -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class -Tell the things teeagers can do : -Listen carefully -Read in chours and invidually, guess meaning then write down -Read the passage and find the activities which teenagers Nm hc
Postlistening (15 mins)
-Ask Ss to tell the things teenagers con do to help the community -Explain some new words and phrases Elderly people : Ngi gi /cao tui Community service : hot ng gip cng ng Volunteer : tnh nguyn vin Neighborhood clean-up campaigns : cc chin dch lm sch cc khu dn c. * Checking vocab : Rub out and remember -Ask Ss to read the passage to find out the activities which teenagers help the community -Call on some Ss to give the answer -Correct and give the correct answers : + Help olderly people + Work as hospital volumteer + Work on neigh borhoad clean_up 116
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th help the comminuvity -Give the answers -Read the passage aloud -Discuss in groups -Give the answers in gront of the class
campaigns -Call on some Ss to read the passage -Class discuss : -Ask Ss to read the two questions then discuss in groups -Call on some groups to give the answers in front of the class -Correct the mistakes
Homework (1 mins)
- ? Ss do exercises in the workbook. Whole class - ? Ss prepare the exercises in the part Language focus2.
V. Self -valuation:
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... .........................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................***..................................
117 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 38th : I/ Objectives By the end of the lesson ,Ss will review the know ledge which have been learnt from unit 4 to unit 6 such as : The present continuons tense , time and subjects. II/ Language content 1. Vocabulary : author, cafeteria, chemistry, rack, shelf, atlas, calculator, fix, marble, swap, anniversary, celebration, collector, concert, 2. Grammar: - Present progressive tense. - What time .................. ? - Adverbs of frequency. - Making suggestions. III. Teaching aids: Book, extra board.... IV. Teaching procedure: Stages Contents Activities Warm up Present progressive tense: Whole class (4 mins) - Present progressive tense: * S+ am/ is/are + Ving. * S+ am/is/are not+V-ing. * Am/is/are+ S+ Ving ? - Let Ss do exercise 1 - ? Ss read out the sentences by sentences. - Teacher corrects and gives the answer key. 118 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 20/11/2011 Teaching date : 23/11/2011 Language focus 2
G/v : Nguyn Th
Review (10 mins)
Practice (20 mins)
* Answer key: do = doing write = is writing read= is reading cook = is cooking play= are playing kick= kicking run = running <+>This, that, these, those. Revise: this, that, these, those. Picture A: This room is very undidy. Picture B: Put that bag away. That isn't my bag, Mom. This is my bag. Picture C: Put those dirty socks in the washing machine. These socks? No, those socks on the bed. Picture D: Throw away those comics but I like these comics <+> Time Revise the way to ask and answer the time. - Have Ss role play the dialogua. b.It's start at seven fifteen(a quarter past seven) c. No, I'll be home at half past ten. thirty past ten. d. I'll come at six forty five. a. quarter to seven. fifteen to seven. 1/ Present progressive tense -Ask Ss to give the formation and use of the present continuose tense -Have Ss make sentences -Ask Ss to do exercise 1 -Have Ss exchange the result with their partners -Call on some Ss to give their answers -Correct & give the correct answers: + is doing 119
- Work in group.
- Give the formation and use -Make sentences -Do exercise 1 -Exchange the results -Give the answers -Copy down Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn + + + + + +
G/v : Nguyn Th Give the use -Look at the pictures and complete the dialogue -Do exercise -Copy down -Look at the clocks and call the time -complete the dialogues -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class -Look at the pictures and call the correct names -Give the subject names -Copy down -Look at the table and write sentences about Ba -Listen -Write 4 sentences Nm hc
is writing is reading is cooking are playing is kicking is sunning 2/ This & that, these & those -Ask Ss to give the use of this, that, these, those -Ask them to look at the pictures carefully and complete the dialogue -Call on some Ss to do exercise in front of the class -Correct & give the correct answers: b/ Put this bag away That isnt my bag ,mum This is my bag c/ Put those dirty socks (on the bed) in the washing basket. These socks ? No, those socks on the bed d/ Throw away those comics But, I like these comes,mom 3/ Time -Ask Ss to look at the clocks in the book then call the time -Have Ss complete the dialogues in the books -Ask them to work in pairs -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class -Correct the mistakes <4> Vocabulary : Subject -Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures in the books and call the correct aubject names -Have some Ss to give the subject names in front of the class -Correct the mistakes & give the correct answers a/ Physical education 120 English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th about Ba -Exchange the results -Give the answers -Copy down -Look at the table -Read dialogues -Make dialogues in pairs
b/ Chemistry c/ Math d/ Geography e/ English f/ History <5> Adverbs of frequency -Have Ss look at the table and ask them to write sentences about Ba, using adverbs of frequency -Make example : Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time -Askk Ss to erite four sentences about Ba -Have Ss exchange the results with their friends -Call on som Ss to gieve the answers aloud -Correct and give the correct answers + Ba seldom rides a bike to school + Ba always practices the guitar after school + Ba usually does his home work in the evening + Ba sometimes plays computer games <6> Making suggestions : -Have Ss look at the table -Ask them to read the short dialogues -Have Ss make similar dialogues using given words or phrases -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class -Correct the mistakes if necessary Production (10 mins) Have Ss do exercise :(extra board) I/ Complete the sentences with the suitable words or phrases 1/ ___dont you come to my house ? 121 English 7 2011-2012
Work in pairs
-Practice in front of the class S1 : Lets play Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th volleyball S2 : Ok S1 : Would you like to watch movies ? S2 : I d love to -Do exercise Go to the board and do Go to the board and write down
Ok. Lets go (Why/lets/what ) 2/ What about __Halong Bay ? (tovisit / visit / visitting ) 3/ Would you like __badminton ? (play / to play / playing ) 4/ Children should __to bed early (go/ to go / going ) 5/ Thats a good__? Lets go to the beach (Thinking/ answer / idea ) II/ Do as directed in the brackets 1. He goes to the library three times a week < make questions> 2. They will visit their grand parents to night (change into negative form) 3. What do you usually do after school ? (answer the questions ? 4. We play soccer (make a suggestion ) -Corerct the mistakes Homework (1 min) Do Ex again at home Review for test
Write homework
Write homework
V. Self -valuation: ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................... .........................***........................... .......
122 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 38th : Written Test 2 I . Objectives : Ss will be able to : * Pronunciation : Choose the word which has differenrt pronunciation from the others * Language focus : - Choose the best answer - Give correct form of the verb in the blank * Reading : Read the passage and answer the questions * Writing : Make questions for underlined words II. Matrix : Ch Nhn bit Thng Vn dng Tng hiu TN TL TN TL TN TL I. 5 5 Pronunciatio 1, 1, n 25 25 II. Language focus III. Reading IV.Writing Tng 15 3 ,75 English 7 2011-2012 75 123 10 3, 2,5 10 Nm hc 5 10 2,5 5 1,25 5 2, 5 5 2,5 30 15 3,75 5 2,5 5 2,5
G/v : Nguyn Th
III.Content : Pronunciation: (1,25 points) Choose the word which has differenrt pronunciation from the others 1. A. chat B. chemistry C. lunch D. teacher 2. A. celebration B. collection C. education D. question 3. A. relax B. snack C. area D. atlas 4. A. receive B. score C. scout D. comics 5. A. rehearse B. hour C. household D. horrible Language focus: (3,75 points) Question1 : Choose the best answer A,B , C hoc D .(2,5 ) 1. ...............................does your father do ? a) What b) where c) when d) why 2. What time .........................................? a) are you going to go to bed ? b) you go to bed ? c) do you go to bed ? d) go to bed ? 3.Hoa has Math ...................Tuesday .................... 7.15 . a) on-at b) from-to c) at-on d) in- at 4. What time does Na ............................history class ? a) study b) have c) learn d)listen 5. They study and lisren to music ............................the same time . a) in b) with c) at d)to 6. American students take .............................. in different activities at recess. a) at b) part c) on d) for 7. We learn...............................to use a computer . a) how b) the way c) what d) what way 8. What are you doing ,Lan ? Im planting .................................... trees . a) the b) some c) any d) a 124 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
9. How ofen does he go to the book club ?............................................... a) He usually goes there after school . b) He go usually there after school . c) He usually go there after school . d) He goes there after school. 10. Would you like to come to my house for lunch ?................................................... a) Yes,I do b) Yes,Id love to. c) Yes, I like d) Yes,I am Question 2. Give correct form of the verbs in the blank 1. Lan (study) Physics in his room now ........................................... 2. She (do) her homework six days a week . ........................................... 3. Would you like ( go ) to the movie this evening ? ........................................... 4. Lets ( go) to the Cafeterial and get a cold drink. ........................................... 5. What should we ( do) this afternoon ............................................ Reading: (2,5 points) Read the passage then answer the following questions Tam and An live in the same neighborhood and go to the same school. They are also in the same class ,but they are different in character .Tam likes studying .He always goes to school on time and does his homework .He usually helps his friends with their exercises. At home he sometimes helps his mother prepare meals. UnlikeTam, An is very lazy .He usually goes to school late. He never does his homework. After school , he often watches T.V or listens to music. 1. What does Tam like doing ? ............................................................................................................... .. 2. Does Tam always go to school on time ? ............................................................................................................... .. 3. How often does Tam help his mother prepare meals ? 125 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn ..
G/v : Nguyn Th
............................................................................................................... 4. How often does An do his home work ? ............................................................................................................... .. 5. What does An often do after school ? .............................................................................................................. ... Writing: (2,5 points) Make questions for underlined words 1. She is practicing the piano now ............................................................................................... 2. My friend and I usually play soccer after school ................................................................................................ 3.Minh goes swimming three times a week ................................................................................................ 4. The children are in the library ................................................................................................ 5. Yes, Id love to . I love pop music ............................................................................................... IV. Answer keys: Pronunciation:Tng s 1,25 dim. Mi cu tr li ng 0,25 im. 1. B 2. D 3. C 4.A 5. B LANGUAGE FOCUS: Tng s im 3,75 im trong : +Question1: 2,5 im, mi cu ng l 0,25 im. 1.A 2.C 3.A 4. B 5. C 6. B 7. A 8. B 9. A 10. B +Question2: 1,25 im, mi cu ng l 0,25 im. 1. is studying 2. does 3. to go 4. go 5. do READING: Tng s 2,5 dim. Mi cu tr li ng 0,5 im. 1.Tam likes studying 2.yes, he does 3.He usually helps his mother prepare meals 4.He never does his homework 5.He often watches TV or listen to music after school WRITING: Tng s 2,5 im. Mi cu ng 0,5 im. 126 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
1.What is she doing now? 2.When do you and your friend usually play soccer? 3.How often does Minh go swimming? 4.Where are the children? 5.Would you like to listen to some pop music ?
Unit 7 : The world of work th Period 40 A . Students work ( A 1 ) I/ Objectives : After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about a students work and practice comparativers with fewer and more II/ Language content 1/ Vocabulary : - Hour (n) - Late later - To last (v) - Early Earlier - Hard - Few Fewer - Many more 2/ Grammar Review the present tense Structure : that takes about 2 hours each day III / Teaching aids : Textbook IV/ Teaching Procedures : Stages Contents Activities Warm up Answer Ts Chatting: (4 mins) questions - Ask some questions about themselves They start + What time do your classes start ? at + What time do they finish ? They finish at 127 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
+ How many hours a day do you do your home work Remark and lead in new lesson : Presentatio n (15 mins) * Set the scene: Introduce the lesson You wil hear a cowersation between Hoa and her uncle about school work 1. Vocabulary -Explain some new words : + An hour (n):gi , ting ( ng h) + To last (v): ko di + Hard (adj): kh + Late Later + Early earlier + Few fewer + Many more -Have Ss play a game Rub put and remember -Have Ss predict the answers ,using questions a,b,c,d 2. Comprehension questions (prediction) a/ What time do Hoas classes start and finish b/ Do your classes start earlier or later ? c/ How many hours a day does Hoa do her homework ? d/ Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa ? -Ask Ss to work in groups -Call on some representatives to give their predictions -Presentation dialogue -Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape -Ask them to read the dialogue a gain and check their preditions -Remark 128 -Listen carefully -Listen and write down -Guess meanings, read in chours and individually copy down
-Play game -Predict the answers
+Work in groups -Give the predictions
Practice (15 mins)
-Look at the book & listen to the tape -Read the dialogue and Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th check the prediction -Work in pairs -Practice the dialogue in front of the class -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class -Copy down -Listen carefully and write down -Make examples -Write down -Listen -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class -Make sentences -Exchange the results -Read aloud
-Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue -Call on some pairs to role phay the dialogue in front of the class -Correct the pronunciation -Questions -Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions -Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions in front of the class -Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Her classes start at 7 oclock b/ They finish at a quarter past eleven c/ She does her home work 2 hours a day d/ She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation Explain the structure That takes about 2 hours each day = It takes Hoa about 2 hours to do her home work each day It takes Sb to make examples -Ask Ss to make examples -Give word cue to drikl + Hoas classes : 7:00 Our classes : 6:45 + The film : 9:30 + The play : 10 :00 + Hoa (work ) : 2 hours Miss Mai : 4 hours Make example S1 : Hoas classes start later than ourclasses S2 : Our classes start earlier than Hoas classes -Have Ss work in pairs -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class 129 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn -Correct the mistakes Production (15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
-Ask Ss to make sentences comparing their work with Hoas work using earber/later/fewer/more -Have Ss exchange the results with their partners -Call on some students to read then sentences aloud -Remark
Do exercise 1 at page
Homework -Learn by heart new words 48 in work (1 min) book V. Self -valuation:
Whole class
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............
.........................***..................................
130 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 7 : Period 41st : I/ Objectives By the end of the lesson , Ss will be bale to compare American studentsvacations and Vietnamese students vacations. Praticing reading and listening skills II/ Language contents 1/ Vocabulary - To celebrate (v) - Easter (n) - Thanks giving - New year s Eve - Independence Day - Chistmas 2/ Grammar : - Review - The present simple tense - Comparetive with later/earlier/fewer/more III / Teaching aids Textbook IV/ Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up Pelmanism _Greetings (4 mins) Early/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / _Play a game later / fewer - Device the class into 2 groups - Ask them to play game - Remark Pre reading (15 mins) - Introduce the situation of the lesson - Present some new words: + To celebrate (v) : t chc, k nim + Easter : + Thanks giving : + New years Eve : + Independence Day : + Chistmas - Correct their pronunciation 131 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date:27/11/2011 Teaching date: 30/11/2011 The world of work Lesson 2 : A - A students work ( A 2,3 )
_Listen carefully _Listen _Guess meanings, read new worlds in chorus and individually
G/v : Nguyn Th copy down
* Checking technique - Have Ss play again What and Where - Ask Ss to do exercise T or F before reading the letter 1/ Vnamese students have fewer vacation than American students 2/ American students have the longest vacation in winter 3/ They dont have a Tet holiday 4/ their most important vacation is New years day 5/ They usually spend their time with their families on Thanks giving and Chirstmas Day _Call on some groups to give their predictions While reading (15 mins) Ask Ss to look at the book and read the letter _Ask them to check their predictions _Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class _Correct and give the correct answers 1T 2F3-T 4F 5T _Call on 2 3 students to read the letter aloud _Questions : _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class _Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Summer vacation in the longest in America b/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family c/ Vnamese students have fewer 132 English 7 2011-2012
_Play game _Do exercise _Work in groups predicting the statements T or F
_Give the precdictions _Read the letter _Check the predictions _Give the answers
_Read the letter aloud _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class _Copy down
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
vacations than american students _Have Ss fill in the grids Vacations Vn Americ stude an nts student s Longest vacation Tet holiday Thanks giving Chistmas Independence Day Easter New years / Eve Day In the summer
_Fill in the grids _Write down in the notebooks
Post reading ? Ss write about Vietnamese Students' Whole class (15 mins) vacations ( use the information form the gird) Ex: We have the longest vacation in summer and we have a Tet holidy.......... -T ask Ss to do A3 (P.74) *Answer keys: a) Thanksgiving b)Independence Day c) New Years Eve (Day) d)Christmas Tapescrip: in Teachers book -Public holiday: ngy l -Firework display: bn pho hoa -Stay up: thc Homework - Ask Ss to learn by heart vocab Whole class (1 min) - Ask Ss to do ex in the work book - Prepare new lesson V. Self -valuation:
...................................................................................................................................
133 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............
.........................***..................................
Unit 7 : The world of work nd Period 42 : Lesson 3 : A-A students work (A4) I/ Objectives After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a typical students life. They will continue practicing reading comprehension II/Language content 1/ Vocabulary : - Lazy - To review - Period - Typical - To take a look - Keer 2/ Grammar Review : _The present simple tense _Comparaties with few/many 134 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date :28/11/2011 Teaching date : 2/12/2011
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn III / Teaching aids: Text book IV/ Teaching Procedures : Stages Contents Warm up Network ( 5 mins) American public holiday
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activities -2 students go to the board and write
Pre-reading ( 19 mins)
-Devide the class into 2 groups -Call on 2 dtudents represented for their groups to go to the board and write down -Remark -Ask Ss some questions alout them selves + What do you do every day ? + How many hours a day do you study ? + Do you have to do a lot of home work ? + (Have) Introduce the situation of the lesson 1. Vocabulary -Explain some new words + period (n) : tit hc + To review(v): n tp + Typical(adj): in hnh + Keen(adj): say m + Lazy(adj): li bing + To take a look (v): nhn vo + Definitely(adv): hon ton -Have Ss play a game -Remark -Ask Ss to prediet the information about Hoa 135
-Answer Ts questions -Listen to the teacher -Listen carefully Guess meanings, read new words in chours and individually , then copy down -Play game -Predict the information Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th about Hoa
1/ Hoa goes to school __day a week 2/ She has__periods aday 3/ She works __hours a week 4/ She has about __ hours of home work every week 5/ Before test , she works __hours a week -Have Ss work in groups -Call on some representativies to give the predictions Whilereading ( 15 mins) -Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape -Ask them to read the text in silent and check their prediction -Call on some Ss to give the answers -Correct and give the correct answers 1/ 6 days 2/ 5 period 3/ 20 hours 4/ 12 hours 5/ 45 hours -Call on 3 4 students to read the text aloud -Correct their pronunciation -Questions -Ask Ss to read the text again & find ort the answers -Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1/ Why do some people think that students have an easy life ? 2/ Lucky number 3/ Does Hoa have to work at home ? 4/ Does Hoa work fewer hours than most workers 5/ How many hours a week do you work ? 6/ Lucky number 7/ How many hours a week does she work before tests ? 136 English 7 2011-2012
-Work in groups -Give the predictions
-Listen to the tape -Read & check the prediction -Give the answers
-Read the text aloud -Read the text then find put the answers -Play game in groups -Answer the questions based on the text
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
8/ How many work fewer or more than Hoa? -Remark Postreading ( 5 mins) Home work ( 1 min) -Ask Ss some questions : -Answer Ts + What do you think of a students life ? questions + Do you think students are lazy ? -Remark -Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each -Write the answer in the notebooks -Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book -Prepare part B1 -Write home work
V. Self -valuation: ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................... .........................***..................................
137 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Unit 7 : the world of work rd Period 43 : B- The worker ( B 1 ) I Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Tims Parents job and the time they work in aweek . They continue practicing reading comprehension . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary :take care of , work part time , Mechanic ,Machine , Shift , Homeless 2.Grammar : Review : the present simple tense III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , IV . Procedure : Stages Contents Activities Warm up Chatting (5 mins) -Greetin - Ask students somes questions about gs . Hoa and themselves . -Answer + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have T questions ? + What do you think about students life ? Remark Pre reading (15 mins) -Introduce the situation of the lesson 1. Vocabulary -Explain some new words or phrases : 138 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Listen to the teacher Listen and
G/v : Nguyn Th write Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down Play a game : what and where . Predict the order of the main ideas . Work in pairs Give the predictions . Look at the book and listen to the tape Read the letter and check the prediction Give the answers Read the letter in front of the class. Work in pairs Practice in front of the class . Copy down.
+ To take care of ( v ) = to look after + To work part time +Mechanic ( n ) + Machine ( n ) + Shift ( n ) + Homeless ( adj ) Checking vocab : What and where 2. Ordering the main ideas : Ask Ss to predict the order of the main ideas a. Mr Joness work . b. Tims introduction of his family. c. Mr Joness vacation time . d. Mrs. Joness work . Have Ss work in pairs . Call on some pairs to give their predictions in front of the class. While reading (15 mins) Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape . Ask Ss to read the letter then check their predictions. -Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class Correct and give the correct answers 1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C -Call some Ss to read the letter in front of the class -Correct the pronunciation . Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the book . Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a.Mrs. Jones works at home . But three mornings a week she works part time at a local 139 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Post reading ( 9 mins)
supermarket. b.She cooks for homeless people once a week . c.Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines in a factory . d.He works about 40 hours a week . e.The Jones family always goes to Florida on vacation . They have a great time there .
Homework ( 1 mins)
-Write a letter about their own family . - Ask Ss to base on Tims letter to write Exchange a letter with the information about their the letters own family. with the - Ask Ss to exchange their letters with partners their partners Read the - Call on some Ss to read the letter in letter in front front of the class. of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Write homework .
- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in workbook. - Prepare part 2,3 V. Self -valuation:
................................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................
Unit 7 : The world of work th Period 44 : B- The worker ( B 2,3,4 ) I . Objectives : After the lesson , the students continue practicing reading skill and comparative with fewer , less and more . 140 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - To feed ( v ) - Main crop ( n ) - To grow ( v ) - Buffalo -To rest ( v ) - Chicken coop ( n ) 2. Grammar : Review : comparative with fewer / less / more III. Teaching aids : Textbook ,. IV. Procedures : Stages Contents Warm up * Chatting : (5 mins) - Ask students some questions about The Jones + How many people are there in Tims family? + What does Tims father do? + How many hours a week does Mr. Jones work? + How many public holidays does he have Pre ? reading - Remark and give marks . (15 mins) * Set the scene - Ask Ss to look at the picture answer the question : Can you guess what the man does ? What are the daily duties of a farmer ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Explain some new words to Ss. 1. Vocabulary + To feed ( v ) : cho n + To rest ( v ) : ngh ngi + Main crop ( n) : v chnh + Buffalo shed ( n ) : chung tru + Chicken coop ( n ) : chung g + Real ( adj ) : s tht Checking vocab : Rub out and remember . Presentation text : _ give some questions about Mr. Tuan 141 English 7 2011-2012
shed ( n )
Activities Answer Ts questions .
Answer the questions : - Listen to the teacher . - Listen and write . Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down. Play game Guess the answers . _ Give the prediction .
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th _ Read the text and check the predictions . Give the answers _Read the text aloud .
While reading (15 mins)
_Read the text about Mr. Tuan - Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan and the again and the letter of Tim then make note letter then about them . make note. - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the _ partner . Exchange - Call on some Ss to give the result in the result front of the class . with the - Correct the mistakes and give the correct partner . answer _ Give the - Ss read the information about the Mr result in Tuan and using the information from the front of the finding friends to fill in the list: class. Hours Day off Vacatio - Write per n time down . week - Listen . Mr.Jones Mr.Tuan Ss practice asking and answering , using the gird B4. +What's peters job? +How many hours a week does he work? +How much time does his vacation last? *Write it up: 142 Nm hc Work in groups
and ask Ss to guess the answers . + Does Mr. Tuan work more hours than Tims father ? + What time does he start work ? + What time does his work finish ? + How many vacations does Mr. Tuan have ? - Call some Ss to give their prediction . - Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan then check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Call some Ss to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation .
Homework (1 min) English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
Ss write about the 4 people ( using the gird B4 ) Example: Peter is a doctor . He works about 70 hours a week. He has 4 week vacation each year........ - Teacher asks : - Who works the most hours? - Who works the fewest hours ? .......................................... . -Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each -Do exercise 2, 3 at page 45, 46 in workbook. - Prepare part 4,5. Preparing date : 4/12/2011 Teaching date : 9/12/2011
- Write in the notebooks . Write homework .
Period 45th correct the test I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know what they understand and what they dont so that they have a new plan for their study in the future II.Content of the knowledge: Grammar: 1.Simple present tense. 2.Simple future tense. 3. Present progressive tense 4.Prepositions. 5.Adjectives. 6.Question words. III.Teaching Procedures: 1.Review: -Almost of students use tenses and prepositions in correct. a)Simple present tense: *Form: S + Vs/es +.............. S + do/ does + not + V +............ 143 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Do/ does + S + V +.................? Wh + do/does +S + V...............? *Use: It is used to talk about actions happen in present, a habit again and again. *Note: -Wh questions b)Preposition: on; at; in; between; after; before. 1.Remark: 2.Results: -After correcting the test, Teacher has the results from students: 7A:..............% 7B:................. ------------------------------------------------------
Preparing date : 10/12/2011 Teaching date : 12/12/2011 UNIT 8: PLACES th Period 46 Lesson 1 : A-Asking the way ( 1,2 ) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer the way to the places . From that they will apply it in the life . II.Language content : 1. Vocabulary : _ National bank of Vietnam _ A souvenir shop _ Saint Paul hospital _ Go straight ahead _ Hanoi railway station _ take a first street 2. Grammar : Could you tell me how to get there ? Could you show me the way to .......? III. Teaching aids.: Textbook, pictures IV. Procedure : Stages Contents Activities
144 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Warm up ( 5 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
*Jumbled words. _ Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words BKAN LOIPHATS TOHEL NSTOAIT TAMREK TOSP FEIFCO _ Call 2 students to go to the board and rearrange these words . _ Correct the mistake and give the correct answer BANK HOSPITAL HOTEL STATION MARKET POST OFFICE * Name the places : _ Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book carefully . _ Have Ss call the names of the pictures . _ Call some Ss to give the answer in front of the class. _ Correct and give the correct answer : a. National bank of Vietnam b. Saint Paul hospital c. Hotel . d. The central post office e. Hanoi railway station f. Dong xuan market Listen and repeat . Then practice the dialogue with a partner . * Set the scene: - Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the questions : Who are they ? Where are they ? What does the tourist want ? - Introduce the situation : A tourist is asking the way . 1. Vocabulary: - Present some new words and structures : + A souvenir shop ( n ) + Could you tell me how to get there ? 145
. _ Play a game . _ Rearrange the jumbled words
Presentati on (15 mins)
_ Look at the pictures carefully _ Call the names of the pictures . _ Write down . Look at the book and answer the questions . _ Listen to the teacher . -Listen and write . Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down - Make sentences - Look at the Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th book and listen to the tape . - Answer the question : He wants to get to a souvenir shop . - Read after the tape . - Work in pairs - Practice in front of the class. - Practice in pairs . - Practice in front of the class - Practice in pairs asking and answering the way . - Practice in front of the class -Listen to the teacher .
Practice (15 mins)
+ Could you show me the way to the supermarket? +Go straight ahead . Take the first street . + Go straight to the first street . Turn left . -Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures .
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : Where does the tourist want to go ? - Call on one student to answer the question . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the tape - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . Production - Call on some pairs to read in front of (8 mins) the class . - Correct the pronunciation. - Give some places and ask Ss to practice in pairs Rong market , Post office . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistake if necessary . *Drill: Example exchange: - Could you tell me the way to the bank ? - go straight ahead . Take the second street, you turn right. It 's opposite the hospital. -Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the way to the places in their neighborhood . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. 146 English 7 2011-2012
Homework (2 mins)
- Write homewor Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn - Remark and repeat the structures about asking the way .
G/v : Nguyn Th k
- Learn by heart new structures by making 3 sentences with them . - Do exercise 1 at page 47 in workbook . - Prepare part 3. Self- valuation: .
. ............................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... ....................
147 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 8 : Period 47th : I. Objectives . The students will continue to practice asking for and giving directions to the places and prepositions of place . Practice speaking and writing skills . II. Language content . The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way . III Teaching aids . Text book , Pictures. IV. Teaching Procedures . Stages Warm up ( 8 mins) Contents * Networks Have Ss play a game : Networks .
Preparing date :11/12/2011 Teaching date : 14/12/2011 PLACES Lesson 2 : A -Asking the way ( 3 )
Activities Play a game : Networks. 2 groups take part in the game .
Preposition s of places
- Call 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board and write down . Go to the - Remark . board and write down . - Ask Ss to look at the street map Presentatio carefully . n -Ask them to call the places in the street Look at the (10 mins) map street map - Have Ss say about the places positions . carefully . - Introduce the question and answer about Call the places 148 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Practice (15 mins)
Producti on ( 10 mins)
Homework ( 2 mins)
the places . in the street Example : map. Where is the bank ? Say about the The bank is between the hotel and the places restaurant . Its opposite the hospital . positions. Listen - Ask Ss to look at 8 places in the box and carefully . the street map . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about these places . Look at 8 - Call some pairs to ask and answer in places in the front of the class . box and the - Correct the mistakes if necessary . street map . -Ask Ss to look at the street map again . Work in pairs . Explain the aims of the exercise to Ss : Practice in Listen to the directions then find out the front of the places . class - Make model : S1 :Where is Go straight ahead to the third street , the police tunr right , what is between the movie station ? theatre and the bakery ? S2: The police Its toystore . station is - Play the tape for Ss ( 2 or 3 times ) between the - Ask them to exchange the results with post office and their partners museum . Its Play the tape again for Ss to check the opposite the results stadium . - Correct the mistake then give the correct S1: Where is answers . the shoe a. Souvenir shop store ? b. Shoe store S2: The shoe c. Hotel store is d. Drugstore between the e. Hospital restaurant and the hotel . Its opposite the Give some places for Ss to practice : supermarket Restaurant / museum / book store - Ask Ss to give the directions to these places . - Call on some Ss to give the directions in 149 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn front of the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary .
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Write the directions to 8 places in the box . - Do exercises in BTBS . - Prepare part 4,5 .
- Write down Give the directions to these places .
- Write homework Self valuation:

. ........................................................................ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................
UNIT 8 : Preiod 48th : I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice asking and answering about distances between two places with How far ..........? II.Language content: 1. Vocabulary : A long way Have a guess Coach 2. Structure : It takes + time + to get ..... How far is it from .....to ......? 150 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
Preparing date : 12/12/2011 Teaching date : 17/12/2011 PLACES Part A - Asking the way ( A 4,5 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
III. Teaching aids : Textbook, map . IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages Contents Activities WARM UP * Hangman - Play a game : (5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 Hangman . words ) + How far + The first word has 6 letters . It is used for asking about distance . + meter + The second word has 5 letters . It is used for measuring distances . + Kilometer + The third word has 8 letters . It is also used for measuring distance. - Remark . PRESENTATION 1. Vocabulary -Listen to the (15 mins) -Introduce the aim of the lesson , then teacher carefully . explain some new words and Guess the structures . meanings , + A long way ( n ) read new + Have a guess words in + Coach ( n ) chorus and + It takes about 18 hours to get there individually by coach . then copy - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and down . listen to the tape . -Look at the -Ask Ss some questions about distance dialogue and using : how far is it listen to the from...............to.................? tape Example : -Answer Ts How far is it from your house to questions school ? How far is it from Nam Dinh to Ha Noi ?
PRACTICE
(15 mins)
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read after the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . 151
-Listen to the tape and read after the tape . -Work in pairs reading the dialogue . -Practice in Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th front of the class . -Answer the question -Look at the map and the table carefully . -Listen carefully Work in pairs .
- Ask Ss to answer the question : How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city ? How far is it from Hue to Ha noi ? b. Look at this table of distances in km . Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the map and the table in the book carefully . - Make example : How far is it from Vinh to Hanoi ? Its about 319 km _ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answerring about the distances . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks .
PRODUCTION
(9 min)
HOMEWORK
* Ask Ss to practice in pairs , using the -Practice in street map about the stores and the front of the table b in language focus 3 , then make class. a conversation about giving direction . - Make example : -Write down . S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the bookstore from the library ? S2 : Go straight ahead, take the first street on the left. The bookstore is -Listen between the minimart and the carefully restaurant . S1 : How far is it from the library ? -Work in pairs . S2 : about 500 meters . Practice in S1 : thank you . front of the S2 : Youre welcome . class . - Ask them to work in pairs . Write down . Call on some pairs to practice in front of theclass. - Correct the mistake and ask them to write down - Do exercise 2 at page 48 in work book Write homework 152 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (1 min) . - Prepare part B1
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 8 : Period 48th : I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to give the requirements . They practice asking and answering about the price . II.Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Envelope ( n ) - Altogether ( adv ) - to send ( v ) - Change ( n ) - To mail ( v ) - to receive ( v ) 2. Structures : - Id like to + V + ........ - How much does/ do + S + cost ? - How much is / are + S ? III. Teaching aids : Textbook IV. Teaching Proceduces : Stages Content Activities WARM UP - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer the (5 mins) Where do you often buy stamps ? questions Which services are supply at the post ( Ss can office ? answer the - Remark and lead in the new lesson . questions in Vietnamese )
PRESENTATION Ask Ss to look at the picture and -
Preparing date : 6/12/2010 Teaching date : 10/12/2010 PLACES B - At the post office ( B 1, 2 )
(15 mins)
- Listen carefully . introduce some services at the post - Look at the office such as : sending letters , sending picture and and receiving parcels , money , buying listen envelopes , stamps .then explain some carefully . Guess the new words and structues : meanings , + Envelope ( n ) : phong b read new + To send ( v ) : gi words in + To mail ( v ) : gi th. chorus and + To receive ( v ) : nhn 153 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th individually , then copy down . - Play game : Slap the board .
+ change ( n ) : tin l, tin tha . + Altogether ( adv ) : tng cng * Checking technique : Slap the board . * Structures: + Id like to + V . + How much is / are + S ? Example : I d like to send this letter to the USA ? How much is the shirt ? Its 2,000 dong How much are these envelopes ? they are 5,000dong - Ask Ss to make sentences , using the structures . - Introduce the situation of the conversation then ask Ss to do exercise . Exercice : T or F predictions a. Lizd like to send the letter to great Britain . b. She need some envelopes . c. They are 2,500 dong . d. The stamps for her letter cost 9,000 dong . e. The envelopes and the stamps are 11,500 dong . - Ask Ss to work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions .
PRACTICE
- Make sentences with the structures - Listen to the teacher . - Work in groups - Give the predictions - Look at the book and listen to the tape then correct the predictions . - Give the answers -Practice in pairs - Practice in Nm hc
(15 mins)
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the predictions . - call on some Ss to give the answers , correct and give the correct answers : a. F b. T c. F d. F e. T - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions in the book . 154
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th front of the class. - Look at the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . - Play a game in groups . - Answer the questions - Write down . - Write a passage
- Have Ss play a game : lucky numbers (1) Where is your nearest post office ? ( 2) LN (3) Where will Liz mail her letter to ? ( 4) How much is the letter to the USA ? (5) How much are these envelopes Liz needs ? (6) LN. (7) How much does Liz pay altogether ? (8) How much change does Liz have ? - Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks .
PRODUCTION -Ask Ss to write a passage using the
(9 min)
questions given + Where is your nearest post office ? + How can you get there from your home ? + What can you buy there ? + Hwo much is it to mail a letter in Viet nam ? + What else can you do at the post office - Read the ? writing aloud . - Go around class and provide help . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and remark .
HOMEWORK
- Learn by heart new words and - Write homework (1 min) structures by write 2 lines for each word and make 3 sentences for each structure . - Do exercise 1 at page 50 in workbook . - Prepare part 2,3 . Self - valuation: . . 155 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................. ................. ...................... ---------------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT 8 : Period 49th : I.Objectives : Arter finishing the lesson Ss will be able to know Reading the dialogue to understand the details and get further practice in Need / would like and post office vocabulary . Practice reading and writing skills . II.Language content : 156 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 11/12/2010 Teaching date : 13/12/2010 PLACES B- At the post office ( B 3, 4, 5 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 1.
G/v : Nguyn Th
Vocabulary : - Local stamp ( n ) - Overseamail ( n ) - Phone card ( n ) - Postcard ( n ) - Writing pad ( n ) 2. Grammar : The simple present with : Need / Would like III. Teaching aids : Textbook, real things such as ; stamp, phone card , post card , writing pad . IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages & Time Warm up (5 mins) Contents - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 words ) Stamp , Envelope , letter - Remark and lead in the new lesson . - Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss : Complete the dialogue with the suitable words - Have Ss do the exercise . - Ask them to exchange the result with the partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answer . Hoa : I would like five local stamps and two stamps for America . Clerk : Here you are . Is that all ? Hoa : I also need a fifty thousand dong phone card . How much is that altogether ? Clerk : That is seventy five thousand dong . Hoa : Here is eighty thousand dong . Clerk : Thanks . Here is your change . - Call on 2 pairs to read the completed dialogue aloud . 157 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Activities - Listen to the teacher carefully
Prelistening (15 mins)
- Do exercise individually . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answers in front the class . - Write down . - Make the similar dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Make the dialogue , using the
G/v : Nguyn Th mapped dialogue , - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write down . - Work in pairs . - Look at the things and call the names . - Predict how much she spend on each of these 5 items . - Work in groups . - Give the predictions .
Ask Ss to make up similar dialogues , using the words in the box . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to look at the things in the book , then call the names of these things . - Introduce the things Mrs Robinson will buy , and ask them to predict what Mrs Robinson will buy first , second ....... and predict how much she spend on each of these 5 items . - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions .
158 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn While listening (15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions about the order . - Call on Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers + Envelopes . + A pen . + A writing pad . + Stamps . + A phone card . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the price . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the answer key : + Envelopes : 2,000 dong + A pen : 1,500 dong + A writing pad : 3,000 dong + Stamps : 500 dong + A phone card : 50, 000 dong - Ask Ss to answer the question : What is the total cost ? How much change will Mrs Robinson have from 60,000 dong ? - Ask Ss to write down the questions and answers in the notebooks . - Have Ss answer the questions in part 5. - Make example : T : How much is it to mail a local letter in VN ? S : It is 800 dong . - Ask them to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct if necessary and ask them to write the questions and the answers in the notebooks . 159
- Listen to the tape and check the predictions . - Give the answers - Listen to the tape again and check the price . - Give the answers Listen and write down . - Answer the questions . - Write down . - Answer the questions . - listen carefully . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class.
Post listening (8 mins)
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Homework (2 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th Write down
- Learn by hear new words by writing 2 lines for each . - Do exercise 2 at page 50 in workbook .
Self - valuation: . . ...................................................................... ......................
Preparing date : 12/12/2010 160 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 50 + 51 + 52 :
Revision
I.Objectives :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will aplly them to do the test well . II.Language content : Review : - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk . IV. Teaching Procedures : 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Chatting some questions with Ss . 2. Consolidation and practice : A. The present progressive tense : - Ask Ss to give the form and use of the present progressive tense : Form: ( + ) S + am / is / are + V-ing . ( - ) S + am / is / are + not + V- ing . ( ? ) Am / is / are + S + v- ing ? Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at a time at present . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : now / at the moment / at present . Ex: She is listening to music at the moment . They are playing marbles in the yard now . - Have Ss make sentences as model . B. The simple future tense : - Have Ss give the form and the use in front of the class . * Form : ( + ) S + Will + V ( without To ) . ( - ) S + Will not + V ( without To ) 161 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
( ? ) Will + S + V ( without To ) ? Use : It is used to express an action or a plan which will happen in the future . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : Tomorrow , Next week / month / year .. Ex: She will go to Ha noi tomorrow . They will have a party next week . - Ask Ss to make sentences . C. Comparative : a) Short adjectives : - Have Ss give the form : S1 + Tobe + adj + er + than + S2 . EX: She is taller than me . This ruler is longer than that one . - Have Ss make sentences in front of the class . b) Long adjectives : _ Ask Ss to give the form : S1 + Tobe + more + adj + than + S2 . EX: This pen is more expensive than that one . He is more inteligent than his brother . Especial cases : Good / well => better Bad / ill => Worse Many / much = > More Little => Less Far => Farther / further . D. Asking answering about distances : - Ask Ss to give the structure about asking and answering the distances : How far is it from.................to.....................? Its about ........................km/m EX: How far is it from your house to school ? Its about 2 km . How far is it from NamDinh to Ha Noi ? Its about 90 km . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . E. Exclamations : What + a / an + ( adj ) + N ! What + ( adj ) + Ns ! EX : What a nice picture ! 162 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
What a cold day ! What naughty boys ! - Have Ss make sentences . F. Adverbs of frequency : Always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom / rarely / never . - Ask Ss to say about the position of adverbs : Ex : He always gets up at 5:00 in the morning . I am never late for school . G. Asking and answering about the price : How much + is / are + S ? => S + is / are + ................ How much + does / do + S + cost ? => It/ They + costs / cost + .................... Ex : How much does this shirt cost ? => It costs 50,000 dong . How much are these envelopes ? => They are 2,000 dong . H. Making suggestions : - Lets + V . - Should we + V ? - How about + V-ing ? - What about + V-ing ? - Why dont we + V ? Agreement : OK / Id love to /Thats a good idea . Disagreement : + Im sorry , I cant . + Im sorry , I cant . Im busy . + Id love to but Im going to................. + Thanks anyway . EX : Lets go to Lan house . Should we play table tennis ? What about going to the movies ? Why dont we go to the beach ? A. Invitation Would you like + N ? Would you like + to V ? EX : Would you like to go to the concert with me ? Would you like to come to my house for lunch ? Yes , Id love to / Yes , please / All right . No, thanks / Id love to but Im busy . I. Asking the way : - Is there .............near here ? / Where is ...................? - Could you tell me how to get there ? - Could you show me the way to the .....................? 163 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- How can I get there ? Go straight ahead / go long this street . Take the first / second street on the left / right ./ Turn right / left . EX : Could you show me the way to the post office ? Go straight ahead , Take the first street on the right . It is opposite the police station . J. Buying things : Id like + N Can I have a/ some + N , please ? I need to buy an English book , please ? 3. Further practice : Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets . a. Tomorrow ( be ) ...............my birthday , so I would like you to come to my house for dinner tonight . b. You shouldnt make noise when our teacher ( teach ) ................. c. The next Sunday will be Lans birthday so I ( buy ) ...............a gift for her tonight . d. Chi ( have ) ................a lot of English books . e. Minh never ( go ) ................to the zoo by bike . f. Listen ! She ( play ) ...............the piano . g. We usually ( play ) ...............Blindmans bluff at recess. h. My father never ( drink ) ................coffee , but at the moment he ( drink ) ...............it i. Id like ( buy ) ...............some envelopes . j. The children enjoy ( read ) .................picture books . Exercise 2: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . a. She doesnt have as many toys as I . => She has ................................................................................ b. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup . => There is ................................................................................ c. I dont have so many friends as my sister . => I have ................................................................................. d. My friends have more candies than I . => I dont ................................................................................ e. My brother drinks more coffee than my sister . => My sister drinks .................................................................... f. She eats more chocolate than I . => I eat .................................................................................... g. She has less flour than he has . 164 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
=> He has ................................................................................. h. There are more students in my class than there are in her class . => There are .................................................................................. i. There is less water in a dessert than there is in a mountain . => There isnt ............................................................................... j. There are fewer singers in a small city than there are in a big city . => There arent ................................................................................ Exercise 3 : Choose the best anser . 1. Hurry or youll be late ...........................school . A. with B. for C. at 2. My homework ...............................about two hours each day . A. takes B. has C. gives 3. Our summer vacation starts in june . It ..............................almost two months . A. happens B. takes C. lasts 4. What do you do ............................the vacation ? A. during B. while C. when 5. We have fun ......................together on the farm . A. working B. work C. to work 6. We dont have classes on Saturday , but we work one hour .........each day . A. more B. much C. many 7. Viet namese students have .....................vacations than American ones . A. few B. fewest C. fewer 8. Many women work ..................home . A. at B. in C. on 9. They take ......................of the house and look after the children . A. care B. homework C. notice 10. My brother always goes to bed early , but he ......................gets up early . A. not B. never C. ever Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the adj/ adv in parentheses . 1. This house isnt very modern . I want a ( modern) ................................one . 2. That building is the ( high ) ......................one in our town . 3. Nam is a good tennis player . I think he is the ( good ) .........................in the club . 4. My bag isnt very heavy . Your bag is ( heavy ) .......................... 165 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
5. We dont know many people . You know ( many )................................people than us 6. It is a very bad film . Its the ( bad ) ...........................film Ive ever seen . 7. What is the ( long )............................river in the world ? 8. Tuan doesnt work hard . I work ( hard )......................................... 9. She doesnt know much . Her sister knows much ( much )................................. 10. They have little freetime but we have ( little )................................................ Exercise 5 : Rearrange the words or phrases to make meaningfull sentences . 1. To/ take/ often/ Mai /minutes / get/ her/ to /bus/ school /it / ten/ by . ................................................................................................................. 2. House / is / it / Minhs / far / to / apartment / how / from/ Liens ? ................................................................................................................. 3. Younger / more / work / hours / my / sister / I / than . ................................................................................................................. 4. Hotel / show / you / me / way / the / to / Bong Sen / Miss / could / the ? .................................................................................................................. 5. Clerk / would / I / like / fifty/ a / thousand / phone / dong / card . ................................................................................................................. 6. Grow / farmers / some / but / main / their / crop / rice / is / the / vegetables . ................................................................................................................. 7. Please / show / me / you / way / the / to /station / nearest / could/ the / police ? ................................................................................................................. 8. By / me / it / about / takes / minutes / ten/ to / from / go / my / to / house / my / factory/ bike / often / fathers . ................................................................................................................. 9. Phone / stamps / would / some / for / Great Britain / a / card / clerk / I / like / and. ................................................................................................................. 10. Loves / theatre / to / Chi/ going / join/ school/ group / she / acting / much/ is / the / because / very . ................................................................................................................ . 4. Consolidation : 166 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . 5. Homework : - Do exercises in the notebooks . - Review for doing the first semester test . -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Period 53rd : The first semester test ( Thi theo chung ) ---------------------------------------------------Period 54th : Corecting The first semester test I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to find their mistakes in the test. II.Teaching aids: Papers tests III.Teaching Procedures: 1.Remarks: 2.Answer keys ( Theo dp n ca phng gio vin) 3.Results: -After correcting the test, Teacher has the results from students: 7A:..............% 7B:..................%
167 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 9 : Period 55th : I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be used to the past simple tense . They will know about some of the irregular verbs and regular verbs . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Aquarium ( n ) - Gift ( n ) - Delicious ( adj ) - To be : was / were - To have => had - To buy => bought - To take => took - To go => went - To talk => talked - To return => returned - To visit => visited 2. Grammar : - The past simple tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Chatting - Answer the (5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions such as : questions + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the 168 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 06/01/2011 Teaching date : 10/01/2011 AT HOME AND AWAY A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A1 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ? - Remark and lead in the new lesson . Presentation 1.Vocabulary (20 mins) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book , then introduce the situation of the lesson . - Explain some new words to Ss : + Aquarium ( n ) : + Gift ( n ) : + Delicious ( adj ) : + To be : was / were ( past ) + To have : had ( past ) + To take : took ( past ) + To go : went ( past ) + To buy : bought ( past ) + To talk : talked ( past ) + To return : returned ( past ) + To visit : visited ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. Checking technique : matching - Ask Ss to match the words with their meanings . Gift Mua Aquarium Ngon Took Mn qu Bought C Delicious Tr v Went H c Had Ly / cm Returned i - Remark and give mark . Practice ( 15 mins - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : - What places did Robinsons visit and what did they do there ? 169 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Look at the picture and listen carefully . - Listen and write down . - Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually
- Do exercise : matching - One student goes to the board and match .
- Look at the book and listen to the tape .
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and repeat after the tape - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation . - troduce quickly the past simple tense , then ask Ss to find out the sentences in the past . - Ask them to read after the teacher these sentences and verbs . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and number the sentences . - Ask them to exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class . - Remark and give the correct answer : 1. Liz went to Nha Trang . 2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen aquarium . 3. Liz bought souvenirs . 4. Liz returned to Ha noi . 5. Liz talked to Ba about her vacation .
- Listen to the tape and read after the tape . -Give the answers - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class .
- Listen carefully and find out the sentences in the past . - Read after the teacher . - Read the dialogue again and number the - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice sentences . asking and answering . - Exchange + Vacation / wonderful the result . + Food / delicious - Give the + Things / expensive answer in + People / friendly front of the + Nha Trang / beautiful class . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in - Write down front of the class . in the - EX: How was the vacation ? notebooks It was wonderful . - Practice asking and 170 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th answering in pairs .
Production ( 4 mins) Homework (1 min)
Practice in - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game front of the class . Play game - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 - Write lines for each . homework - Do exercise 1 at page 53 in workbook . - Prepare A2.
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. ............................................................................................... ..
171 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 9 : Period 56th : A - A holiday in Nha Trang ( A2 ) I.Objectives : - Students read the passage for details about the Robinsons vacation and practice Wh- questions in the past simple tense . - They continue to practice reading skill. II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Shark ( n ) - Crab ( n ) - Dolphin ( n ) - Cap ( n ) - Turtle ( n ) - Exit ( n ) - To eat => ate - To see => Saw - To think => thought - To wear => wore 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up *Pelmanism - Play a (5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism : game in 2 + Go , have , went , talk , bought , had , groups . take , took , talked . - Remark . Pre- reading (15 mins) * Set the scene: - Introduce the lesson : In the last period , we heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha trang with her family . In todays lesson , we will read the text about one of the most interesting and memorable activities which Liz and her family did during the vacation the visit to Tri Nguyen aquarium . 172 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Listen carefully
Preparing date : 06/01/2011 Teaching date : 12/01/2011 AT HOME AND AWAY
- Listen and write down . - Guess the
G/v : Nguyn Th meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down . - Play a game : what and where
1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss. + Shark ( n ): + Dolphin ( n ) : + Turtle ( n ) : + Crab ( n ) : + Cap ( n ) : + Exit ( n ) : + To eat => ate ( past ) + To see => saw ( past ) + To wear => wore ( past ) + To think => thought ( past ) Checking technique : What and where * Matching : Eat wore See thought Wear ate think saw - Remark . 2. True / False prediction Before reading the text , ask Ss to do exercise : T or F prediction . a. The Robinsons went to TN aquarium . b. They saw many different types of fish . c. Liz bought a little turtle . d. They had lunch at a food stall. e. Liz ate fish and crab . - Ask Ss to discuss in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions. - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their predictions . While reading - Call some Ss to give the answers . (15 mins) - Correct and give the correct answer : a. T b. T c. F d. T e. F - Have Ss read the text in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the text again and find out the answers for the questions . 173 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen then do exercise .
- Work in groups . - Give the predictions .
- Look at the book and listen to the tape and check the
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th prediction .
- Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a.Lizs parents went to the aquarium with her. b.They saw many different types of fish . c.They bought a cap in the souvenir shop . d.Yes, she did . She wore the cap all day . e.Yes, they do . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate fish and crab . f.Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium .
- Read the text in front of the class. - Read the text again and find out the answers - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Ask Ss to tell the story of Lizs trip to TN -Look at the pictures and aquarium , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and retell the story . tell thestory , using the pictures . - Some Ss go - Remark and give marks . to the board and tell the story . - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 - Write lines for each homework . - Write the story about Lizs trip . - Do exercise 2 at page 53 in workbook
Homework (2 mins)
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. 174 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
............................................................................................... ..
UNIT 9 : Period 57th: I.Objectives : After finishing the lesson the Ss will read Bas diary to understand the details and talk about past activities Students cotinue to practice reading skill. II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - To keep in touch - To teach => taught - To rent => rented - To improve => improved - To move => moved 175 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 07/01/2011 Teaching date : 13/01/2011 AT HOME AND AWAY A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A 4, 5 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . III.Teaching aids : Textbook, IV.Procedure Stages & Contents Time Warm up * Networks ( 5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Networks
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activities - Play a game : Networks 2 teams take part in the game - Students go to the board and write .
Regular verbs Looked
Irregular verbs
bought
- Devide the class into 2 teams - Remark . Read Bas diary . 1. Vocabulary - Introduce the situation of the lesson , Pre reading then explain some new words : ( 15 mins) + To keep in touch ( v ) : + To rent ( v ) => rented ( past ) + To move ( v ) => moved ( past ) + To teach ( v ) => taught ( past ) + to improve ( v ) => improved ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . * Checking vocabulary: Slap the board 3. True or False prediction 1) The Robinsons are American . 2) Mr Robinson works at a hospital in Hanoi . 176 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Listen to the teacher and write down . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down . - Give the predictions . - Read the diary and
G/v : Nguyn Th check the predictions . - Give the answers . . - Read the diary aloud . - Correct the false sentences . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Go to the board and write . - Copy down .
While reading ( 15 mins)
3) They rented a house next door to Bas . 4) They moved to a new apartment last week . 5) Liz and Ba are the same age . - Ask Ss to work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to read Bas diary then check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1.T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T - Call on some Ss to read the diary aloud . - Ask Ss to read the sentences from a to g , then read the diary again in order to correct the false sentences . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partner . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the true sentences . - Correct and give the correct answers . a) Liz lived next door to Ba . b) Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet nam . c) Ba collects stamps. d) Lizs aunt lives in New York . e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of hanoi . f) The Robinsons moved . Now Ba is sad / unhappy g) Ba will see Liz next week . 1. Play with words . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and say about these activities . - Ask them to look at the book and listen to the tape - Have Ss read after the tape . - Call on some Ss to read aloud . 177
- Look at the pictures and say about them . - Listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Read aloud .
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Production ( 9 mins)
- Ask Ss to imagine Liz is their new friend . Write a letter to one of their friends to tell him or her about Liz and her family . EX: Dear........, Im glad to tell you that I have a new friend . Her name is Liz . She is American . ..... - call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Remark .
- Write a letter to a friend about Liz and her family . - Read the letter in front of the class .
Homework ( 1 min)
- Write - Write again the letter in the exercise homework book . - Do exercise 4 at page 54 in workbook . Prepare part B1,2.
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................. ................
178 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Preparing date : 13/01/2011 Teaching date : 16/01/2011 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY th Period 58 : B- Neighbors ( B1,2 ) I.Objectives : After the lesson , the students will practice the past simple tense in negative and interrogative forms and short answers to talk about past activities . II. Language contents : 1.Vocabulary : - Hairdresser - Neighbor - Dressmaker - Material -To make => made - To cut => cut 2 .Grammar : The past simple tense in negative and interrogative . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, cassette and tape , picture . IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Time Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents * Pelmanism - Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism come , improve , wore , came , received , improved , receive , wear , teach , taught . 179 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Activities - Play a game : Pelmanism
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn - Demonstrate the group which is winer .
G/v : Nguyn Th
Presentatio n - Ask Ss to look at the picture and ( 15 mins) guess what they are doing . * Set the scene : Lan and Hoa are friends . they are talking . Now you listen to the tape and tell me what they are talking about . - Play the tape for Ss . 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss : + Hairdresser ( n ): th ct tc n + Dressmaker ( n ) : th may + Neighbor ( n ) : hng xm + Material ( n ) : cht liu, vi + To make ( v ) => made : lm + To cut ( v ) => cut : ct - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember . Practice ( 15 mins)
- Look at the picture and guess - Listen to the teacher . - Listen to the tape . - Listen and write down . Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .
- Play a game : Rub - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again out and then answer the question . - Correct and give the correct answer : remember . They are talking about Hoas hair , - Listen to the tape again , dress . then answer - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read the question . after the tape . - Read after - Have Ss work in pairs reading the the tape . dialogue. - Work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice the . dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and -Practice in find out the answers for the questions . front of the class. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer - Read the dialogue in front of the class . again and find - Correct and give the correct 180 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn answers : a) She is a hairdresser . b) She is a dressmaker .
G/v : Nguyn Th out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Copy down . - Listen to the teacher . - Play a game : Guessing game - Write the sentences in a paper sheet . - Write homework .
Production (9 mins)
Homework (1 min)
- Repeat the form of short answer of the past simple tense . - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game . EX: Yesterday I went to a .......and I bought a/ an ............. + Did you go to ..............? + Did you buy ................? - Remark . - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them . - Do exercises 1,2 at page 55, 56 in workbook . - Prepare part 3,4 .
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................. ................
UNIT 9 : English 7 2011-2012
Preparing date : 16/01/2011 Teaching date : 19/01/2011 AT HOME AND AWAY 181 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 59th: B - Neighbors ( B 3,4 ) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will read the text for details to understand Hoas sewing work and further practice in WH- questions to talk about past activities . Practice reading and writing skills . II. Language contents : 1.Vocabulary : - Hobby - To sew - Sewing machine - To decide => decided - Cushion - To try => tried - Useful - To fit => fitted 2 . Grammar : The simple past tense . Wh questions to talk about past activities . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, extra board , tape , cassette , picture . IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up - Answer the - Ask Ss some questions : ( 5 mins) questions . + What did you do lastnight ? + Did you watch TV ? + Did you do your homework ? + What time did you go to bed ? .................. - Remark . 1. Vocabulary - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words : + Hobby ( n ) : + Sewing machine ( n ) : + Cushion ( n ) : + Useful ( adj ) : + To sew ( v ) : + To decide ( v ) => decided ( past ) + To try (v ) => tried ( past ) + To fit ( v ) => fitted ( past ) 182 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Pre reading ( 15 mins)
- Listen then write down . - Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . * Checking vocabulary : What and where . 2. Structures: - Introduce the form of short answers . - Make model sentences : + Did Hoa buy the dress ? No, she didnt . + Did her aunt cut her hair ? Yes , she did . - Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the information in the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Remark . 3. T or F prediction ( use an extra board) 1) Hoa decided to learn how to sew . 2) She didnt buy some material. 3) She made a cushion for her armchair . 4) Next, She made a shirt . 5) It was blue with white flowers on it . - Have Ss do exercise in groups -Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the results . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer 183 English 7 2011-2012
- Work in groups - Give the predictions .
- Listen to the tape and check the predictions . - Give the results - Read the passage aloud . - Read the Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th passage again and find out the answers - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class - Copy down .
in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers a) She learned how to use a sewing machine . b) She made a cushion for her armchair first . c) It was blue and white . d) Next , she made a skirt . e) It was green with white flowers on it . f) It looked very pretty . g) She tried it on but it didnt fit . h) Hoas neighbor helped her . i) Finally, It fitted very well. 4. Write . Put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense . - Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss . - Ask Ss to read the sentences . - Ask them to complete the sentences with the form of the verbs in the past simple tense . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down . - Correct and give the correct answer : Watched bought cut used decided was made was wasnt helped fitted
- Listen to the teacher . - Read the sentences in the book . - Complete the sentences . - Exchange the results with the partner. - Go to the board and write down . - Copy down . - Listen to the teacher carefully - Work in pairs asking answering using whNm hc
5. Discussion: - Repeat the form of Wh- questions : Wh - question + did + S + Verb.........? EX: Where did you buy this shirt ? I bought it in the shop . What did you do lastnight ? 184
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn I watched TV . - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering using Wh questions . - Remark . Homework ( 2 mins) - Learn by heart part remember by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 56,57 in workbook . - Prepare language focus .
G/v : Nguyn Th questions to talk about past activities . - Write homework .
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................. ................ Preparing date : 17/01/2011 Teaching date : 20/01/2011 th Period 60 : LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will practice the past simple tense , prepositions of places , How much How far to talk about the price and distance , comparatives with more , less and fewer . II. Language contents : - The past simple tense . - How much is it ? - Prepositions of places . - Comparatives . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , extra board . IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Pelmanism: Work in 2 185 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (5 mins) - Play a game pelmanism 1- eat 7 ate
G/v : Nguyn Th groups and play a game - Give a real thing and ask ss to make qs about its price and answer - Sts do -Give situations and ask ss to give examples - Sts do
Presentatio n (10 mins)
1. Grammar (use an extra board) - Review grammar points (use an extra board) a. About the price Ex: how much is this pen? Its 2.000 dong How much + is/are + N/Ns? It/ they + is/ are + s tin b. About distance Ex: How far is it from HB to HN? It is about 40 kilometres How far is it from ....to .........? It is (about) ............................ c. Preposition of position - on, in , near, to the right, opposite,........ Ex: - the book store is on Hue street - It it between the restaurant and the minimart d. More, less, fewer - Hoa has 2 pens. Lan has 3 pens Ex: Lan has more pen than Hoa e . Past time Ex: I watched T..V last night He went to HN yesterday Lan visited me 2 days ago Adv: Yesterday,last week/ night / summer , a week ago
- Ask ss to tell the prepositions that they have learned -Ask ss to make examples base on the map in the book (P 96) - Sts do
Practice (20 mins) English 7 2011-2012
1) How much is it ? a) Work with a partner . Read the dialogue . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Ask ss to repeat the structure to ask 186
- Read the dialogue in pairs. - Give the Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th structure asking answering the price : - Make similar dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Give the prepositions of places. - Write the location of each store . - Read the location of the stores. - Give the structure of asking and answering the distance . - Practice in front of the class. - Write past form of the verbs . - Write on the board . - Write in the notebook .
and answer about the price . Ex : How much is the green dress? = How much does the green dress cost ? b) Now make similar dialogues . - Ask Ss to use the information in the table to make similar dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake . 2) Prepositions : - Have Ss give the prepositions of places . - Ask Ss to look at the map . Write the location of each store . EX: The clothing store is on Hai Ba trung street . Its near the shoe store to the right . - Call some Ss to say about the location of the stores. - Remark . - Call one student to give the structure of asking and answering the distance . - Ask Ss to use the information in the table to work in pairs : one asks and one answers . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. 3) Past simple tense : a) Write the past form of the verbs . -Ask Ss to write the past form of the verbs . - Call on one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and give the correct answer : + Buy => bought + help => helped 187 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
+ Remember => remembered + take => took + send => sent think => thought talk => talked b) Complete the sentences . Use the words in the box . - Ask Ss to use the words in the box to complete the sentences . - Call on some Ss to do exercise . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1) Played 2) Talked 3) bought 4) Worked 5) Sent - Ask Ss to write down . 4) Simple tenses : - Have Ss to look at Ngas diary then complete the dialogue . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of theclass . - Correct the mistake and give the key : Nga: Everyday I clean my room , help my mom and study English . Minh : What did you do yesterday ? Nga : I cleaned my room, helped my mom, studied E , watched TV , played volleyball and stayed at Hoas house. Minh: How about tomorrow? Nga : Ill study E, clean my room, help my mom, see a movie, visit my grandmother and buy new shoes . 5)More , less , fewer . - Ask Ss to repeat the use of more , less and fewer - Ask Ss to look at the two refregerators and write sentences , using more , less and fewer . 188 English 7 2011-2012
- Complete the sentences with the given words - Do exercise in front of the class. - Write down .
- Complete the dialogue. - Work in pairs . - Role play in front of the class .
- Repeat the use of more, less and fewer . - Look at
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Call on some Ss to go to the board two and write down . refregeratos - Correct and give the correct answers : and write + Before there were more bananas , sentences . Now there are fewer bananas . - Go to the + Before there was more milk . Now board and there was less milk . write down . - Copy down . Production (8 mins) Homework (8 mins) * Bingo Write the past form of the verbs . - Do all exercises again at home - Prepare new lesson Unit 10 Work in individual Whole class
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................. ............... Preparing date : 20/01/2011 Teaching date : 24/01/2011 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE st Period 61 : A- Personal hygiene ( A1,2 ) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will read a letter to understand the details about Hoa and her family . they will cotinue to practice the simple present and the simple past tenses . II. Language contents : 1.Vocabulary : - Harvest - To take morning exercises - Helpful - To iron 189 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn - To hope - Probably 2.Grammar : - The simple present tense - The simple past tense . III.Teaching aids : Textbook , picture. IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Time *Brainstorming : Warm up ( 5 mins) es.. Class. From. Lives with.. Live in..
HOA
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activities Lik - Greetings .
Work in groups .
Presentatio n ( 8 mins)
- Ask Ss to discuss about Hoa in groups . - Call on 2 groups to demonstrate their discussion in front of the class . - Remark and lead in new lesson . 1. Vocabulary - Introduce the lesson then explain some new words + Harvest ( n ): + Helpful ( adj ) : + To take morning exercises : + To hope ( v ): + To iron ( v ): + Probably ( adv ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : what and where in order to check new words . 190
Demonstrate the discussion . - Listen and write down . - Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually the copy down in the notebook .
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Play a game . - Order the sentences .
Prelistening ( 8 mins)
Whilelistening English 7 2011-2012
- Ask Ss to order the sentences of Hoas moms letter a. Your dad and I hope youre fine . b. I hope youre taking care of yourself . c. I received a letter from your aunt last week . d. I miss you a lot . e. Dont forget to write . f. Your grand father talks about you a lot . - Call some Ss to give their predictions . - Ask Ss to look at the letter and listen to the tape , then check their predictions . - Call some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1- a 2- f 3- c 4- b 5- d 6- e - Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the letter again then find out the answers for the questions in the book . - Have Ss work in pairs . 3. Pre- listening : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures then introduce the aim of the lesson to Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss . + To polish ( v ) : + To change ( v ): + To comb ( v ) : + Pants ( n ) : + Sandals ( n ) : + To drink ( v ) => drank ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Ask Ss to predict the order of the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give their 191
- Give their predictions . - Look at the book and listen to the tape , then check the predictions . - Give the answers . - Read the letter aloud . - Read the letter again to find out the answers for the questions . - Work in pairs . - Play a game : lucky numbers . ( Answer the questions ) - Write the answers in
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (9 mins) predictions .
G/v : Nguyn Th the notebooks .
- Play the tape for Ss and ask them to check their predictions . ( 2 times ) - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and check . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. a 2.e 3. f 4. d 5. g 6. c 7. h 8. b - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday . EX: Yesterday , Hoa got up, she took a shower and put on her clothes ........ - Call on some Ss to tell what Hoa did yesterday in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to imagine they are Hoa . Write a letter to her mother . - Go around the class and provide the help - Have Ss exchange the letter with their partners . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Correct the common mistakes . - Remark .
Homework ( 1 min)
- Write a letter to Hoas mother Exchange the letter with the partner . - Read the letters in front of the class .
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Rewrite the letter in the - Write exercisebook . homework . - Do exercise 1 at page 61 in workbook . - Prepare part 2. V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 192 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
.................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................. ................ Preparing date : 21/01/2011 Teaching date : 26/01/2011 HEALTH AND HYGIENE A- Personal hygiene ( A3,4 )
UNIT 10 : Period 62nd: I. Objectives The students continue to practice about personal hygiene through the listening and reading the diary . Practice listening and speaking skills . II. Language contents : 1.Vocabulary : - To polish - To comb - To change - Sandals - Pants - To drink => drank 2.Grammar : Review the past simple tense III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Wordsquare (5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare . - Greetings . - Play a D Z S E N T E game . X - 2 groups I K A J C B D take part in G the game . D O W C K A A A -Ask Ss to find the past tense of irregular verbs - Remark . 193 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Pre reading (15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
B. Write
A. Read Nams diary . - Ask Ss to look at Nams diary and tell about Nams daily routines . - Call on one student to read Nams diary . - Have Ss work in pairs asking answering about Nams daily routines . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Ask them to write a diary about themselves based on Nams diary . - Ask them to exchange their writing with the partner . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. - Remark . B. Write - Ask Ss to talk about Hoas mom letter . - Give some cues or questions : + Did Hoa get a letter from her mother ? + Did her mom visit her after the harvest ? + Can Hoa take care of herself ? + Does she get up early every morning ? + Des she go to bed late ? + Will she write to her mom soon ? - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Remark . - Ask Ss to look at the letter in the book then complete the letter with the suitable words . - Have Ss exchange the result with the 194
- Look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday . - Some Ss tell about Hoa in front of the class . - Read Nams diary . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Write a diary based on Nams . - Exchange the writing with the partner . Talk about Hoas mom letter . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Complete the letter . - Exchange the result with the partner . Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th - Give the answers in front of the class . - Copy down Work in groups of four . - Read the letters in front of the class . - Put the letters on the board . - Write a letter to a penpal . -Read the letter aloud . - Write about yesterdays activities . - Read the writing in front of the class . - Write homework .
partner - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . - Correct Was , having , show , take , get , go , Consolidatio wash , iron , eating , told , see/ meet , n: go . - Ask Ss to write down . - Ask Ss to work in groups of four writing the letter on the posters . Homework : - Call on some groups to read the letter in front of the class . - Ask Ss to put their letters on the board then compare their work . 3.Consolidation : - Ask Ss to write about what they did yesterday . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class. 4.Homework : - Write a passage about Hoas activites using the pictures in the book . - Do exercise 3 at page 62 in workbook . - Prepare part 4 .
UNIT 10 : Period 63rd: I. Objectives After the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about a visit to the dentist . They will be used to asking and answering about this topic . II. Language contents : 195 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date : 23/01/2011 Teaching date : 27/01/2011 HEALTH AND HYGIENE B- A bad toothache ( B1 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
1.Vocabulary : - Dentist - To fill - Appointment - To hate - Drill - To hurt - Cavity - Scared 2.Grammar : - The simple present and past tense - Whats the matter ? = Whats wrong ? III.Teaching aids : Textbook , picture . IV Teaching Procedures : Stages & Time Warm up ( 5 mins ) Contents * Hangman - Have Ss play a game : Hangman Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel - Remark . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What will you do if you have a tooth ache? + When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist do * Set the scene : Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : Whats the matter with Minh , the boy in the picture ? 1. Vocabulary - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . + Dentist ( n ) : + An appointment ( n ) : + Scared ( adj ) : + Cavity ( n ) : + To fill ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v ) + To hurt ( v ) : + Drill ( n ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually 196 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Activities - Play a game .
- Answer the questions . - Look at the picture then answer the questions . Listen and write down . - Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down - Play a game : Slap the
G/v : Nguyn Th board . - Two groups take part in the game . - Listen to the tape , then find the answers . - Listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Answer the questions . - Listen . - Read the dialogue again and find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Play a game in groups . Answer the questions .
Practice (15 mins)
* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the questions : + What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ? +What happened to Hoa last week ? + How did the doctor help Hoa ? - Play the tape for Ss . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to read after the tape - Ask Ss to answer the questions above . - Correct and give the correct answers . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . 2. Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1. Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ? 2. What is wrong with Minh ? 3. LN 4. Does Minh like going to the dentist ? How do you know ? 5. Are you scared of seeing the dentist ? 6. LN 7. What did the dentist do with Hoas toothache ? 8. What did you do the last time you had a bad toothache 9. LN 10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ? - Demonstrate the result . - remark . - Ask Ss to write the answers in the 197
- Write the answers in the
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th notebooks . - Play a game - Ask and asnwer in front of the class . - Write homework .
Homework ( 1 min )
notebooks . 3. Find someone who - Have Ss play a game : Find someone who? Find someone who Name .....has a toothache ? .....likes going to the dentist ? .....is scared of seeing the dentist ? EX : S1: Do you have a toothache ? S2 : Yes / No S1 : Do you like going to the dentist ? - Remark .
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Do exercise 1 at page 63 in workbook . - Prepare part B2,3 . V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. .............................................................................................. ... Preparing date : 09/02/2011 Teaching date : 12/02/2011 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE th Period 64 : B- A bad toothache ( B2,3 ) I. Objectives By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Dr Lais job . They continue to practice about the topic of toothache . Practice listening and reading skills . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - To explain - To remind 198 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Sensibly - Surgery - To smile - To check - To notice 2.Grammar : Review : the simple present tense III. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board . IV. Procedure : Stages & Time Warm up (5 mins) Contents * Slap the board - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board Denti st Appointm ent Scare d Hurt Cavity Toothac he - Play a game . - Two groups take part in the game . Activities
Presentati on ( 15 mins)
*Set the scene - Introduce the situation of the listening . - Ask Ss to read the questions in the book then guess the answers for the questions . - Call on some groups to give their answers. - Play the tape for Ss checking their predictions . 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss. + To explain ( v ) : + To remind ( v ) : + Sensibly ( adv ) : + Surgrey ( n ) : + To smile ( v ) : + To notice ( v ) : + Serious ( adj ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually 199
- Listen to the teacher . - Read the questions in the book and guess the answers - Give the predictions . - Listen and check the predictions . - Listen and write down .
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Practice (15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down .
- Play the tape again for Ss. - Ask Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again for Ss checking the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . a. Dr Lai is a dentist . b. She wears uniform to work . c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai . d. She explains what will happen. She gives them advice . - Ask Ss to write down . a) Listen and read . - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions : + What is the matter with Minh ? + How does he feel ? + What is the doctor doing ? + Why does that happen to Minh ? - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape ( two times ) - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of the class - Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable words . Production - Have Ss exchange the results with their ( 8 mins) partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes then give the answer key : Homework Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices ( 2 mins) this . She smiles to Minh and tells him not to worry . She explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to brush them regularly . After Dr Lai fills his tooth , Minh leaves . He is very pleased - Call on some Ss to read the completed 200 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the tape to check the predictions
- Give the answers . - Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud .
- Complete the story with the suitable words . - Exchange the result with the
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th partner . - Write homework .
the story aloud . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercises 2,3 at page 65 in workbook . - Prepare part 4,5 .
UNIT 10 : Period 65th: I.Objectives : The students continue to practice speaking about health and hygiene , using simple present tense . II. Language content : - Practice vocabulary about health and hygiene . - The present simple tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , IV.Procedure Stages & Time Warm up (7 mins) Contents * Networks - Have Ss play a game : Networks Activities - Play a game - 2 groups take part in the game .
Preparing date : 06/02/2011 Teaching date : 09/02/2011 HEALTH AND HYGIENE B- A bad toothache ( B 4,5,6 )
Health and hygiene - Go to the Take morning exercises board and - Call on students from 2 groups to go write down . to the board and write down . - Remark. * Set the scene Presentatio - Ask Ss to tell what happenned to Minh n . 201 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Tell what happened to Minh . - Listen to the teacher . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class - Listen and write down .
Practice (20 mins)
- Introduce the way to make sentence and the question : why and the answer to Ss . 1. Model sentence - Make example : Minhs tooth hurts . Why ? Because he has a cavity . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and model then work in pairs asking and answering based on the pictures and the words given . 2. Picture drill - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer . a. Minh is nervous . Why ? Because he is seeing the dentist . b. the cavity is not serious . Why ? Because it is small. c. Minh is happy . Why ? Because his teeth are OK. - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . 3. Write . Complete this poster with a partner . - Introduce the situation and the aim of the exercise to Ss. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and examples. - Have Ss look at the pictures and write sentences as model . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give their ideas in front of the class . - Correct the mistake . 202
- Listen to the teacher . - Look at the pictures and the example . - Write sentences - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th ideas in front of the class. - Write down . - Work in groups Demonstrate their ideas in front of the class. - Write homework .
Homework ( 2 mins)
4. Discussion - Ask Ss to work in groups discussing the question: What should we do and what shouldnt we do if we want to have healthy teeth? - Go around class and provide the help. - Call on some Ss from some groups to present their ideas in front of the class. - Remark and give marks .
- Write the poster : what should we do and shouldnt do if we have healthy teeth ? - Do exercise 4 at page 65 in workbook . - Prepare unit 11 A1 V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .................................................................................... Preparing date : 07/02/2011 Teaching date : 10/02/2011 KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY. A - A check - up ( A1 )
UNIT 11 : Period 66th: I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and give the requests and the reponses . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Medical check up - To measure - Medical record - To weigh - Height - Weight - Temperature - To take ones temperature - Scales - Normal 2. Grammar : - The structure : Would you + V ? - Review the simple present tense III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures . 203 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn IV.Procedure : Stages & Time Warm up ( 7 mins) Contents
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activities - Answer the questions .
* Chatting - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you eat much candy ? + Do you often eat ice- creams? + How often do you brush your teeth ? + If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ? - Remark and lead in new lesson .
- Look at the picture and - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the guess : Where are they ? questions . What are they doing ? - Listen to the 1. Vocabulary - Introduce the situation of the lesson , teacher . then explain some new words to Ss . - Read new words in + Medical check- up ( n ) : chorus and + Medical record ( n ) : individually , + Height ( n ) : guess the + To measure ( v ) : meanings , + To weigh ( v ) : then copy + Temperrature ( n ) : down . + To take ones temperrature + Scales ( n ) : - Play a game + Normal ( adj ) : : rub out and 1. Structure: Would you open your mouth remember . - Guess the , please ? order of the Would you + V ....... ? sentences . - Have Ss read new words in chorus - Give the and individually . * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and predictions in front of the remember class . - Have Ss guess the content of the dialogue and order the sentences . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions in front of the class . 204 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Practice ( 15 mins )
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Look at the - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen books and listen to the to the tape then check their order . - Ask them to read the dialogue again tape . - Read the and give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers dialogue and check the : predictions . 1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B - Ask Ss to write the correct answer in - Write the correct the notebooks. answers . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Work in - Call on some pairs to practice pairs . reading in front of the class . - Practice in 3. Comprehension questions : front of the -Have Ss play a game : Lucky class . numbers 1. What were the students of QT school - Play a game : doing ? Answer the 2. LN questions 3. Who was doing the medical check up ? 4. What did the nurse do ? 5. LN 6. What was Hoas temperature ? Was it normal? 7. What was her height ? 8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ? - 2 groups 3.Consolidation : take part in the game 4. Noughts and crosses . Play a game - Ask Ss to use the structure : Would :Noughts and you + V ? crosses to make the sentences by playing a game :
205 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th Make sentences with the cues .
Take the form temperature Homework (1 min) Measure your Sit down height
Open your mouth Get on the scales
Fill in
- Make example : Would you open your mouth , please ? Remark . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook . - Prepare part 2, 3 . - Write homework .
V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. .............................................................................................. . Preparing date : 17/02/2011 Teaching date : 21/02/2011 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY th Period 67 : A- A check - up ( A 2 ) I.Objectives : 206 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . II. Language contents : 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 2. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , casstte . IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Slap the board ( 8 mins) - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board - Play a game Medical : Slap the Normal record board . Medical check up Height Weigh Measur e - 2 groups take part in the game .Clap the hands
Pre listening ( 10 mins)
Scale s - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . * Set the scene A. Listen . Then write the missing words . - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words . Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ? Hoa : Fourteen . Dr : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ? Hoa : No. I think Im shorter . The nurse 207
- Listen to the teacher carefully - Read the dialogue and guess the missing
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th words . - Listen to the tape carefully . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Listen and copy down .
While listening ( 15 mins)
measured me . Dr : Oh . How tall are you ? Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters . Dr : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ? Hoa : I think Im 42 kilograms . Dr : No. It says on your form that youre 40 kilograms . - Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find out the words to fill in the blanks . - Ask Ss to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . * Answer keys: ask , how , your , shorter , me , tall , meter centimeters .will , nurse , height , think , no ,form - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . Ask Ss to work in groups : Ask their friends in order to have information and write in the form . Name Male/Fe Age Weight Height
- Complete the form in the notebooks . - Play a game . - Work in groups
Homework ( 2 mins )
- Call on some groups to practice in front of the class 208
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Practice in - Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook front of the class. . - Write - Prepare part B1 . homework . V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. .................................................................................................................. ............................. Preparing date : 18/02/2011 Teaching date : 23/02/2011 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY th Period 68 : A- A check - up ( A 3 ) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . II. Language contents : 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 2. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , casstte . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Matching (5 mins ) - match - Ask Ss to match a. Medical check 209 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc 1. o - 2 groups
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn b. c. d. e. f. Presentatio n (15 mins) up Medical report Normal Measure Weight Height 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
G/v : Nguyn Th Chiu cao Phiu y t bnh thng Kim tra y t Cn nng take part in the game Clap the hands
Practice (15 mins)
Ask and answer questions with a partner . - Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions : + Which school does he go to ? + What is his surname ? + How tall is he ? = Whats his height ? + Whats his weight ? = How heavy is he ? - Ask Ss to work in pairs : One is A , the other is B asking and asnwering the information to complete the medical record . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to complete the form in their notebooks . MEDICAL RECORD school: class : FULL NAME Fornames (tn m v tn chnh ) Surname: Address Male ( n) Female ( nam ) age Weight Kg Height Cm - ? Ss work in pairs to ask and answer to their friends. 210
- Listen to the teacher carefully - Work in pairs . - Some pairs pratice in front of the class . - Complete the form in the notebooks .
- Practice in
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn a. Which school does he/she go? b. What is his/ her name ? c. Where does he/she live? d. How old is he/she ? e How tall is he/she? heavy is he/she ?
G/v : Nguyn Th front of the class
Ask Ss to work in groups : Ask their friends in order to have information and write in the form . Homework ( 2 mins ) Name Male/Fe Height Age Weight - Work in groups
- Call on some groups to practice in front of the class - Write Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook homework . . Prepare part B1 . V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................................................. ............................. Preparing date : 20/02/2011 Teaching date : 26/02/2011 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY th Period 69 : B- What was wrong with you? ( B1,2 3 ) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and asnwer questios about sickness and further practice in the past simple , question forms and negative forms II. Language content : 211 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
1. Vocabulary : - Bad cold - Sick note - Headache - Virus - Stomachache - Flu 2. Grammar : The simple past tense : question forms and negative forms . Structures : What is/ was wrong with SB ? I have/ had a headache . She has / had a bad cold . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Chatting ( 5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions about themselves . Answer Ts EX: How tall are you ? questions . What s your weight ? How old are you ? ............................ - Remark and give marks . Presentatio n ( 8 mins) - Introduce the situation of the lesson the explain some new words and structures : + To have a bad cold : a headache . a virus . flu . a stomachache . + To be sick = to be ill . + Sick note ( n ) : Have Ss play a game - Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ? EX: What was wrong with you ? I had a headache . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and 212 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Listen to the teacher and copy down . Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings then copy down . - Make sentences What was wrong with her ?
Practice
G/v : Nguyn Th She had a bad cold . - Look at the pictures and answer the questions . - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class.
PreEnglish 7 2011-2012
answer the questions : +. What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? What was wrong with her - Have Ss listen to the tape and look at the books then check the answers. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the books . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers : a) Lan didnt go to school yesterday because she had a bad cold . b) She had a headache . c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess . d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus . e) The doctor wrote Lans sick note . - Ask Ss to copy down . * Survey - Introduce the aim of the exercise . - Ask Ss to work in groups of four and ask them to choose a secretary for their group. - Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey - EX: Were you absent from school last semester ? Did you have a cold ? a stomachache ? the flu ? a toothache ? - Ask the secretaries to give the results of their groups . - Combine the result for the whole 213
- Copy down . - Listen to the teacher . - Work in groups - Take a survey .
- Give the Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn listening (4 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th results of the groups . - Answer the questions . - Listen to the teacher . - Draw the table . - Predict the days lost through sickness. - Give prediction .Listen complete the table . - Exchange - Give the answer in front of the class . - Listen to the tape and check the answers . - Copy down . - Work in pairs .
While listening (8 mins)
Homework (2 mins)
class . - Ask Ss to answer the questions : What was the most common illness? What was the least common illness? - Remark . * Listen . - Introduce the aim of the listening to Ss . - Ask Ss to draw the table in the notebooks . - Have Ss predict the days lost through sickness in class 7A last semester . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions - Have Ss listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Play the tape again for Ss to complete the table . - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class . - Play the tape again for Ss to check their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : + Cold : 10 + Flu : 43 + Stomachache : 37 + Headache : 5 + Toothache : 17 + Total days lost : 112 - Give some cues and ask Ss to practice in pairs . You / a cold . She / toothache . Lan / headache . He / flu . Ba / Stomachache . 214
- Listen . - Work in pairs . - Practice in Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
Make example : front of the S1 : What was wrong with you ? class. S2: I had a cold . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Remark . - Learn by heart new words by writing - Write 3 lines for each . homework . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in workbook . - Prepare part 2,3 . V. Self- valuation .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................. .......................................................... .................................................................................................................. ............................. ................................................................................................................. ............................. Preparing date : 17/02/2010 Teaching date : 20/02/2010 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY th Period 70 : B- What was wrong with you? ( B4,5) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the common cold and the cues to prevent it . Practice readind skill. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Disease - Symptom - Runny nose - Slight fever - To cough - To sneeze - To prevent - To relieve - Cure => to cure - To disappear 2.Grammar : The simple present tense III. Teaching aids : Textbook picture , tape and cassette IV.Teaching Procedures : 215 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Stages & Time Warm up (5 mins) Contents
G/v : Nguyn Th Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : guessing game . - All class take part in the game
* Guessing game - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Ask Ss to write a disease which they caught last time in a paper sheet . - Have one student go to the board and others guess - Remark , ask Ss some questions about the disease they caught and lead in the new lesson . * Set the scene - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . 1. Vocabulary + Disease ( n ) : Bnh + Symptom ( n ) : Triu chng + Runny nose ( n ) : S mi + Slight fever ( n ) : St nh + To cough ( v ) : Ho + To sneeze ( v ) : Ht hi + To relieve ( v ) : Lm gim + To prevent ( v ) : Ngn nga + To disappear ( v ) : Bin mt + Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Cha tr - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . * Checking vocabulary: rub out and remember - Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss work in groups discussing the questions : + Why do people call the cold common ? + What are the symptoms of the common cold ? - Call some Ss from groups to give their discussion in front of the class . 216
Prereading (15 mins)
- Listen to the teacher carefully . Read new words in chorus and individually , then guess the meanings and copy down .
- Play a game . - Work in groups . - Give the answers in front of the Nm hc
While reading (15 mins) English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th class .
Homework (2 mins)
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their discussion . - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to answer the prequestions . - Have some Ss read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss read the text again and find out the answers for the questions in the book. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers : 2. Comprehension questions a.Because every year millions of people catch it . b.They are : a runny nose , a slight fever , coughing and sneezing . c.No, there is no cure for the common cold . d.No, these medicines dont cure a cold , but they relieve the symptoms . e.We can prevent a cold by eating well , doing exercise , keeping fit and staying healthy . Ask Ss to write about the common cold . - Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the class . - Remark .
- Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Read the text in silent . - Answer the questions . - Read the text aloud . - Read the text again and find out the answers - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Copy down .
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook . - Prepare unit 12- A1 V. Self- valuation 217 English 7 2011-2012
- Write about the common cold . - Read the writing aloud . - Write homework.
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ............................
Period 71st
English written test ( The 3rd written test )
Objectives: - Check the students knowlegde from Unit 9 to Unit 11 Ss need to get: Language focus: - The simple past tense - Talk about your vacation - Describe the characteristics of friends and neighbors - Talk about habits - Describe a process - Talk about habit and routines - Read and write a diary entry - Talk about a visit to the dentist - Talk about temperature, height and weight - Describe health and safety precautions - Talk about sicknesses, their symptoms, and cures Reading: Read about Dr Chi, choose the best answer and answer the questions Writing: Use cue words to write Mapped test Level Identify Thng hiu Vn dng Total Titlle TN TL TN TL Th Cao p Language 10 2 5 3 20 focus 2,5 0,5 1,25 0,75 5 218 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Reading Writing Total 15 4,5 10 3 3 1,5 2 1 3 1,5 5 2,5
G/v : Nguyn Th 5 2,5 5 2,5 1 0 30
2 1
Questions
A/Language focus I. Choose the word which has a different pronunciation from the others ( 1,25 points) 1. a. brushed b. rented c. talked d. stopped 2. a. patient b. appointmentc. vacation d. aquarium 3. a. drill b. medical c. virus d. disease 4. a. prevent b. sensibly c. clever d. exit 5. a. instead b. headache c. measure d. disappear II. Choose the best answer: (2,5 points) 1. Hello Lan, welcome back. How ................. your vacation in Da Lat? A. is B. was C. will be D. are 2. Remember........................your teeth after meals A. brush B. to brush C. brushed D. brushing 3. You dont look very well. Whats the... ................., Minh?. A. toothache B. with you C. matter D. wrong 4. My teacher teaches me how .................... . A. to sew B. sewing C. sewing machine D. for sew 5. .............. you............... a bad cold and a headache yesterday?. A. Are ............ having B. Do ........... have C. Will ......... have D. Did ............ have 6. The Browns ..................................return to HaNoi by car last week. A. wasnt B. werent C. didnt D. dont 7. Nam is absent today.............................he is ill A. Why B. because C. so D. when 8. What is your ...................? - Im 43 kilos A. heavy B. height C. tall D. weight 9. ................. didnt you go to school today?- Because I had a headache A. What B. Where C. How D. Why 219 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
10. I know how to take care ..................... myself. A. of B. in C. at D. on. III. Give correct form of the verbs in the parentheses ( 1,25 points) 1. Trang had a big breakfast this morning . She (eat) a loaf of bread and three eggs 2. Minh (not visit) the museum with his class last Sunday because he caught a cold 3. Lans mother wants her not (stay) up late. 4. Everyone (wait) the doctor in the sittingroom at the moment 5. You should (do) morning exercises. B/ Reading Read the passage and answer the questions (2,5 points) Dr Chi is a dentist at Nguyen Tri Phuong school. She looks after all the studentsteeth. Dr. Chis office is clean and so is her uniform. She always washes her hands after each children leaves. Many children are scared when they come to see Dr. Chi, but she is a kind woman. She explains what will happen so they are not afraid. Dr. Chi gives the children advice. She tells them how to look after their teeth. She reminds them to clean their teeth regularly. a. Choose the best answer (1,5 points) 1. Dr Chi is a ................... at Nguyen Tri Phuong school. A. dentist B. teacher C. nurse 2. Every day she looks after the .......................... A. Students feet B. Students teeth C. Students tooth 3. Dr Chis uniform is ........................ A. clean B. nice C. white b. Answer the questions (1 point) 4. Why arent the students afraid of Dr Chi? .............................................................................................................. ....... 5. How does Dr Chi help the children? .............................................................................................................. ...... C/ Writing Use the cues below to write about Lizs trip to Nha Trang (1,5 points) 1. Last summer/ Liz/ go/ Nha Trang/ with/ parents/ ......................................................................................... ..................................... 220 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
2. They/ stay/ in/ hotel/ near/ beach ........................................................................................................ ...................... 3. There/ they/ go swimming/ and/ go sightseeing ........................................................................................................ ...................... 4. They/ buy/some gilfs/ friends/ family ........................................................................................................ ..................... 5. They/ return/ HaNoi/ yesterday ........................................................................................................ .....................
ANSWER KEYS
A/Language focus I. Choose the word which has a different pronounciation from the others 1. b rented 2. a patient 3. c virus 4. a prevent 5. d disappear II. Choose the best answer 1. B. was 2. B. to brush 3. C. matter 4. A. to sew 5. D. Did.........have 6. C. didnt 7. B. because 8. D. weight 9. D. Why 10. A. of III. Give correct form of the verbs in the parentheses 1. ate 2. didnt visit 3. to stay 4. is waiting 5. do IV. Read the passage and answer the questions 221 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 1. 2. 3. 4.
G/v : Nguyn Th
A. dentist B. Students teeth A. clean Because she explains what will happen when they have teethache 5. Dr. Chi gives the children advice, she tells them how to look after their teeth. and reminds them to clean their teeth regularly
222 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 72nd Corecting the test I / Aims : Students can summarize the knowledge they have learnt and know how to improve their knowledge of English . II / Teaching aids : Test papers , chalk , boards III / Procedure : T calls students to give the resunts Correct and give the real answers Answer keys: IV/ Results 7A:.......................% 7B: ............................%
223 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 12 : Period 73rd: I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the details and practice food vocabulary . II. Language contents : 1.Vocabulary : - Spinach - Durian - cucumber - Papaya - Pineapple - Ripe -To smell 2 2. Grammar : - The simple present tense . - The structure : Id like...... So do I / I do , too Neither do I / I dont , either . III.Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures . IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Kims game ( 5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Kims game . ( Use the pictures or words written on - Play a the board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk , game . bananas, apples , carrots , oranges ) - Call the students to go to the board and write again . - Go to the - Remark and lead in the new lesson . board and write * Free questions - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer Ts Presentatio + Do you usually go to the market ? questions . n + Who do you often go to the - Listen to 224 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 26/2/2011 Teaching date: 1/3/2011 LETS EAT! A - What shall we eat ? ( A1,2 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn ( 15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th the teacher and guess what they bought . - Listen and write . - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings and copy down . Make sentences as models.
market with ? + What do you often see / buy at the market ? .............. - Introduce the situation of the lesson to Ss and ask Ss to guess what Hoa and her aunt bought at the market . 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words and structures to Ss . + Spinach ( n ) : Rau chn vt + Cucumber ( n ) : Da chut + Papaya ( n ) : u + Pineapple ( n ) : Qu da + Durian ( n ) : Qu su ring + Ripe ( adj ) : chn + To smell ( v ) : ngi thy / c mi * Checking vocabulary: Have Ss play a game : What and where . 2. Structures : + I like spinach and cucumbers . So do I / I do , too. + I dont like pork . Neither do I ./ I dont , either . - Have Ss look at the pictures and listen to the tape . - Ask Ss to look at the book and read after the tape - Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . .- Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to find out the answer in the book . 3. Comprehension questions - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1) What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ? 2) LN. 225
Play a game . - Work in pairs .
- Look at the pictures and listen to the tape - Read after the tape . - Practice reading in front of the class .
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Read the dialogues again to find the answer . - Play a game in 2 groups . Take the numbers and answer the questions . - Clap the hands - Write the answers in the notebook . - Talk about the food . - Work in groups making conversation s. - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework .
3) Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt ? 4) LN. 5) What meat would they like for dinner ? 6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoas aunt? 7) LN 8) What fruit did they buy ? 9) Why didnt they buy a papaya ? 10) LN - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . - Ask Ss to write the answer in the notebook 4. Discussion - Have Ss talk about the food they like and dislike . - Ask Ss to work in group of four making real conversations about shopping . - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class - Remark and give marks . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Do exercise 1 at page 74 in workbook . - Prepare part 2 .
Homework ( 2 mins )
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ ......................................................................................
226 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 12 : Period 74th: I.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will understand how to make a meal by making some dishes . II. Language contents : 1.Vocabulary : 227 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 28/2/2011 Teaching date: 2/3/2011 LETS EAT! A - What shall we eat ? ( A3,4,5 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
- To slice - Bowl - To boil - To heat - To stir- fry - Soy sauce - Chopsticks - Spoon 2. Grammar : The past simple tense III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures . IV.Teaching Procedures : Stages & Contents Time Warm up * Chatting ( 5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions : EX: Do you like chicken? Beef ? Do you know how to prepare a meal ? Lead in the new lesson . Pre reading ( 15 mins) * Set the scene - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What is she doing ? - Call on some Ss to give the answer . 1. Vocabulary - Introduce the situation and explain some new words to Ss . + To slice ( v ) : Thi + To boil ( v ) : Luc + To heat ( v ) : un nng + To stir fry ( v ) : Xo + Bowl ( n ) : Ci bt + Chopsticks ( n ) : a + Soy sauce ( n ) : X du + Spoon ( n ) : Tha - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually - Correct their pronunciation . * Checking vocabulary: - Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember in order to check new words . 2. Prediction 228 English 7 2011-2012
Activities - Greetings . - Answer Ts questions .
- Look at the pictures and answer the question . - Listen to the teacher .
Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Play a game . - Do exercise . - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the order .
- Have Ss guess the order of the statements : a) First , she sliced the beef . b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some spinach . c) Hoas aunt cooked dinner . d) Next, she sliced some green pepers and onions . e) And then she set the table and the family sat down to eat . f) After that she stir- fried the beef and vegetables . g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made cucumber salad . - Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the sentences - Call on some groups to give their prediction - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the order . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Ask Ss to work in groups to write the menu - Call on some groups to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : + Cucumber salad with onions . + Boiled spinach + Stir- fried beef with green pepers and onions + Rice - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Have Ss read the text again then complete the sentences by adding the missing verbs . - Have Ss exchange the results with their 229
- Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud . - Work in groups . - Give the answers . - Write down . - Read the text again and complete the sentences . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers . - Write
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
partners . down . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Match the - Correct and give the answer key : sentences 1. Slice 2. slice 3. heat 4. stir- fry with the 5. add 6. cook 7. add pictures . - Ask Ss to match the completed - Exchange sentences with the pictures . the result - Have Ss exchange the results with the with the Post partner . partner . reading - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Give the ( 9 mins ) - Correct and ask Ss to write down . answer . 1. C 2. F 3. A 4. D 5. B 6. E - Write 7. G down . A. Write . What did you eat and drink - Asnwer yesterday ? the - Ask some Ss the questions : what did question . Homework you eat and drink yesterday ? - Work in ( 1 min ) - Have Ss work in pairs asking and pairs . answering the questions . - Practice in - Call on some pairs to practice in front of front of the the class . class . 3. Writing - Write a - Have Ss write a short paragraph to tell short what they ate and drank yesterday . paragraph . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in - Read the front of the class . writing in - Remark . front of the 4.Homework : class . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write - Lear part remember . homework . - Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook . - Prepare B1 . V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ ...................................................................................... 230 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 12 : Period 75th: I.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctors and the reason which caused Bas stomachache . II. Language content : The structures : - It must be ........ 1. It was probably .......... 2. Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt . - Thepast simple tense and present simple tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Guessing game ( 5 mins ) - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game . - Greetings . 231 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 01/3/2011 Teaching date: 4/3/2011 LETS EAT! B Our food ( B1 )
G/v : Nguyn Th - Play a game . - All class take part in the game - Look at the picture carefully - Give the predictions -Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Give the answers . - Listen to the teacher and copy down . Makesentenc es using the structures . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading - Play a game 2 groups take part in the game .
( Each student writes a sentence about the disease they had last time . One student goes to the board and the rest guess ) - Remark and lead in the new lesson . * Set the scene Presentati - Ask Ss to look at the picture and on answer the question : (15 mins) Where is Ba ? What is the matter with him ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . 1 - Explain some structures to Ss . + It must be something you ate . + It was probably the spinach . + That dirt can make you sick . + These medicine will make you feel better. - Have Ss make sentences with the Practice structures . (15 mins) - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation . - Call on some Ss to give the correct answers . + Ba is at the doctors . + He has an awful stomachache . 2- Comprehension questions : - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers . 1. What did Ba eat last night ? 2.Who washed the spinach ? 3.LN 4.Why did Ba go to the doctor? 5.Did his parents eat spinach ? 6.LN Production 7.What made him sick ? ( 8 mins) 8.What did the doctor give him ? 232 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Homework ( 2 mins)
-Remark and state the group which wins the game . 3- Now complete the story . - Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above . - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . - Correct and give answer key : Ba went to the doctor because he was sick . The doctor asked Ba some questions . Ba said he had some spinach last night . The doctor said he must wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty . The dirt can make people sick . She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make him feel better . - Call on some Ss to read the story in front of the class . - Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with each . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in workbook . - Prepare part B2.
- Clap hands . - Complete the story . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the result - Copy down . - Read the story aloud . - Listen carefully . - Write homework .
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ ......................................................................................
233 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 12 : Period 76th: I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . They will know what they should do to have a healthy lifestyle. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Balanced diet - Energy - To affect - Body- building food - Moderate - Dairy product - Amount - Cereals - Lifestyle - Plenty of 2.Grammar : III.Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Chatting (5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer Ts + What do you usually have for questions . breakfast / lunch / dinner ? + What is your favorite food ? - Remark and lead in new lesson . * Set the scene: - Introduce the situation : Food plays an - Listen to Pre reading important part in our life . It gives us the the (15 mins) main energy for body development . thus teacher . , a balanced diet is especially important . In our todays lesson , we will learn about the definition of a balanced diet and useful guidelines about food 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words and phrases to Ss. - Listen and + Balanced diet ( n ) : Ch n write . 234 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 04/3/2011 Teaching date: 6/3/2011 LETS EAT! B Our food ( B2 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
While reading (15 mins)
hp l + To affect ( v ) : nh hng + Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n ) + Amount ( n ) : S lng + Energy ( n ) : Nng lng + Body- building food ( n ) : Thc n gip pht trin c th. + Dairy product ( n ) : Thc phm b sa + Cereals ( n ) : Ng cc + Lifestyle ( n ) : Li sng + Fatty food ( n ) : Thc n giu cht bo - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember . 2. True / False prediction - Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F prediction What does a balanced diet mean? 1) Eat a lot of meat . 2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables . 3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar . 4) Eat a little fatty food . 5) Eat plenty of food you like . - Have Ss discuss in groups . - Call on Ss to give their discussion . - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer : 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F - Have Ss read the passage in silent . - Call on 3 or 4 students to read the passage aloud . - Ask Ss to read the passage again and 235
- Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings , then copy down . - Play a game . - Do exercise . - Work in groups . - Give their prediction. - Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Give the answers . - Read in silent - Some Ss read the passage aloud . - Read to find out the answers - Work in pairs - Practice asking and
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th answering in front of the class . - Write - Do exercise . - Do exercise then talk about a balanced diet - Listen . - Work in groups .
find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy . b) A balanced diet is not enough all people need exercise to keep a healthy life . c) Ss Answers . 3. Matching - Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching - Ask Ss match and talk about a A lot of Sugar balanced diet . Fatty food Should Meat A little Fruit Too much Coffee Deep-
Homework (2 mins)
fried food Shouldnt Vegetables Plenty of - Make example : Eggs To have a balanced diet we should eat a lot of fruit .......... - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some gr oups to give their dicussion in front of the class . - Remark . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Write a menu for yourself and your family . - Prepare part 4 .
- Give the discussion in front of the class . Write homework .
V. Self- valuation 236 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ .....................................................................................
UNIT 12 : Period 77th: I.Objectives : The students will listen to a text for details and further practice in food vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill . II . Language content : - Review the food vocabulary . - The past simple tense III. Teaching aids : 237 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 08/3/2011 Teaching date: 14/3/2011 LETS EAT! B Our food ( B3,4,5 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
Textbook , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Time Warm up * Slap the board ( 5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . Modera te Energy Dairy product Body-building food Amou nt Affect Balanced diet
Activities
- Play a game : Slap the board .
Pre listening ( 15 mins)
- Have 6 students from 2 groups take part in the game . - Remark and state the group which wins the game 1. Pre - listening : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the things in the pictures. - Call on 3 or 4 students to give their answers - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a. Rice b. Noodles c. Fish d. Vegetables e. Fruit f. Beef g. Juice h. Water - Introduce the aim of the listening , then ask Ss to predict what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for their lunch . - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction
- groups take part in the game Clap the hands - Look at the pictures and call the names of the things . - Listen to the teacher
- Work in groups - Give the prediction . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to - Look at the the tape , then check their prediction . book and 238 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th listen to the tape . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Listen to the tape again and check the result . - Write down . - Write - Read the writings aloud - Play a game in 2 groups . - Answer the questions using the information in the listening .
- Play the tape for Ss ( two times ) - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . - Play the tape again for Ss to check . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : Lan : f, b, d ,g Nga : a, d ,g Ba : c, a , e , h Hoa : b,e, g. Post - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and write listening ( 8 what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for mins) lunch . - Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud - Remark . 3. Lucky numbers - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1) What did Lan have for lunch ? 2) LN . 3) Did Ba have some fruit ? 4) Who had vegetables ? Homework 5) LN ( 2 mins) 6) Who drank juice ? 7) What did Ba drink ? 8) Did Hoa have fish ? - Remark .
- Write a paragraph about Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for lunch . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 77,78 in workbook . - Write - Prepare language focus 4 . homework . V. Self- valuation
239 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ .....................................................................................
Preparing date: 12/3/2011 Teaching date: 16/3/2011 Period 78th : LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 I.Objectives : The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well . II. Language content : 1.The simple past tense . 2. Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much . 3. Too / either / neither / so . 4. Imperatives . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Chatting ( 5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What did you do yesterday ? - Answer Ts + Did you watch TV last night ? questions . + What did you do during last summer vacation ? 240 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................. - Remark and lead in new lesson . I.Revision 1. Past simple tense : Consolidatio - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the n and book and answer what they are doing . practice : - Call on some Ss to answer the 1)Past questions in front of the class . simple a) Watch TV . tense : b) Eat at a restaurant . c) Go to the movie theatre . d) Read books . e) Play soccer . - Have Ss answer the questions , using the pictures Make example : S1: Did you do your homework last night ? S2: No, I didnt . I watched TV . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct and give the correct answers . b. Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ? No, I didnt . I ate dinner at a restaurant . c . Did you go to school yesterday ? No, I didnt . I went to the movie theatre . d. Did you watch a video on the weekend ? No, I didnt . I read books . e. Did you play basketball yesterday ? 2)Indefinite No, I didnt . I played soccer . quantifiers : - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . 2. Indefinite quantifiers : - Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . 241 English 7 2011-2012
- Look at the pictures and answer what they are doing . - Answer the questions .
- Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class - Write down .
- Repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Do exercise . - Write the correct expression . - Give the answer . - Write down in the notebooks . - Look at the pictures and complete the dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Repeat the use of too, either , so and neither . - Practice the dialogues in pairs . - Practice in front of the class - Look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - Listen and write down . - Give the Nm hc
3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither .
5) Imperatives :
- Ask them to do exercise 2 . a. Write the correct expression . - Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : + A little coffee . + A lot of salt . + A lot of tea . + Too much water . + A little sugar - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . b.Complete the dialogues : - Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Remark . 3+ 4.Too and either / So and neither . - Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither . - Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class . - Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the EX: S1: I like mangoes . S2: So do I / I do , too . S1: I dont like bananas . S2 : I dont , either / Neither do I . 5. Imperatives : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - explain some new words : + To Peel ( v ) + To mix ( v ) 242
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Homework
G/v : Nguyn Th answer . - Write down in the notebooks .
+ Vinegar ( n ) - Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) peel e) Add b) Wash f) Stir c) Slice g) Wait d) Mix - Do test yourself 4 in workbook - Review for doing a written test .
- Write homework .
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ .....................................................................................
243 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Preparing date: 13/3/2011 Teaching date: 17/3/2011 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES th Period 79 : A - Sports ( A1,2 ) I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports . They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Skate boarding - Roller- skating - Roller blading - Baseball - Surprisingly - Surprising result . - To win - Competition - Prize - Participant 2. Grammar : Review the simple past tense and simple present tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, pictures . IV.Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Chatting ( 5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you like playing sports ? - Answer Ts + What sport do you play ? questions . + When do you play .....? + Who do you often play with ? + What do you think about .........? .............. - Remark and lead in new lesson . * Set the scene 244 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
A) Listen and read . Then answer the Presentatio questions . n - Introduce the situation of the lesson ( 15 mins) and ask Ss to look at the pictures then answer the questions : What are they doing ? 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words : + Skate boarding ( n ) : + Roller- skating ( n ) : + Roller- blading ( n ) : + Baseball ( n ) : + Surprising result ( n ) : + Surprisingly ( adv ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually * Checking vocabulary: Slap the board . 2. Prediction Have Ss discuss in groups about the question : What sports do you think are the most popular in the USA ? - Call on some groups to give their prediction . Practice ( 15 mins) - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Have Ss answer the question : What is the most popular sport in the USA ? Which sport is at 11th position ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and Production answering the questions . ( 8 mins) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class 3. Survey - Take a class survey : 245 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the teacher , look at the pictures and answer the question . - Listen and write down . - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down - Play a game - Work in groups . - Give the prediction . - Look at the books , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Read the text in silent and aloud . - Copy down. - Work in groups . - Practice in front of the class .
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Write the number of the students who like each sport best . - Answer the question .
Homework ( 2 mins)
- Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates what sport they like most . - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class . - Ask Ss to write the number of students who like each sport best , then complete the table in the notebooks . - Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is the most popular in the class ?
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 - Write lines for each . homework . - Write what sports you like best . - Do exercise 1,2 in workbook . - Prepare part A3,5 V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ ..................................................................................... Preparing date: 21/3/2011 Teaching date: 23/3/2011 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES th Period 80 : A - Sports ( A3,5 ) I.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs .They will continue to talk about sports . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely - Cyclist - To cycle - To be aware of - Lifeguard - Strict - To obey 2 .Grammar : Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb 246 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . IV.Procedure : Stages & Contents Time Warm up * Networks ( 5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Networks
G/v : Nguyn Th
Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : Networks Discuss in groups .
Most popular sports in the USA
- Have Ss work in groups . - Call on Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write . - Remark and state the group which wins the game . * Set the scene: Listen . Then practice with a partner . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the pictures . 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss . + Good ( adj ) => well ( adv ) + Skillful ( adj ) => Skillfully ( adv ) + Safe ( adj ) => Safely ( adv ) + Cyclist ( n ) : + To cycle ( v ) = To ride a bike * Checking vocabulary: What and where 2. Grammar - Introduce how to change adjectives into adverbs and the use of Adj and Adv : Adjective + ly => adverb EX : Slow => Slowly 247
- Go to the board and write - Listen to the teacher . - Listen and write down . Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down . - Listen to the teacher carefully .
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Bad => badly + Hes a good soccer player He plays soccer well + Shes a quick runner She runs quickly . - Adjectives often go with To Be Practice - Adverbs often go with ordinary ( 15 mins) verbs . - Ask Ss to make sentences using adj and adv - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the text . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class A) Write . Change the adjectives in brackets to adverbs . - Ask Ss to complete the passage with the correct adverbs in brackets . - Explain some new words to Ss . + To be aware of : + Lifeguard ( n ) + Strict ( adj ) => Strictly + To obey ( v ) - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner Production - Call on 2=> 3 Ss to give the results in ( 8 mins) front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Repeat the way to change adjective to adverb . - Give some cues and ask Ss to make sentences . + Slow / slowly / swimmer + Quick / quickly / runner + Bad / badly / volleyball Make example : + Shes a slow runner 248 English 7 2011-2012
Homework ( 2 mins)
- Make sentences with the adjectives and adverbs . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Work in pairs - Practice reading in front of the class . - Complete the passage with the correct adverbs . - Listen and write down . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the results in front of the class . - Write down . - Listen . - Make sentences with the Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th cues .
She runs slowly . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 83 in workbook . - Prepare part A4,6 .
Practice in front of the class . - Write homework.
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ .....................................................................................
249 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 13 : Period 81st : I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports . They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Skate boarding - Roller- skating - Roller blading - Baseball - Surprisingly - Surprising result . - To win - Competition - Prize - Participant 2 .Grammar : Review the simple past tense and simple present tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, pictures . IV.Procedures : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Chatting ( 5 mins) - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer Ts + Do you like playing sports ? questions . + What sport do you play ? + When do you play .......? + Who do you often play with ? 250 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 23/3/2011 Teaching date: 24/3/2011 ACTIVITIES A - Sports ( A4,6 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
+ What do you think about ..............? ................. - Remark and lead in new lesson . * Set the scene Pre reading Read . Then answer the questions . ( 10 mins) - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question: what kind of sports in the picture ? What is WFF? WTS? - Call on some Ss to answer . - Ask Ss to read the text and check the answer. 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss. + To win ( v ) => won + Prize ( n ) : + Participant ( n ) : A person who take part in the game . While - Have Ss read new words in chorus and reading individually . (20 mins) - Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Correct the pronunciation . 2. Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a) He takes part in WFF. b) His school team won the first prize , they were so happy and wanted to keep this activity . c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday morning , and the other is walk- to school day d) Its 5 km from school to the beach . e) Wednesday is the WTS day . 251 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the teacher , look at the pictures and answer the question . - Listen and write down .
- Read - Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .
- Copy down. Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Post reading ( 9 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
Homework (1 min)
f) Members living near school often take part in the WTS day . - Ask Ss to copy down . 3. Survey - Take a class survey : - Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates what sport they like most . - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class . - Ask Ss to write the number of students who like each sport best , then complete the table in the notebooks . - Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is the most popular in the class ? - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write what sports you like best . - Do exercise 1,2 in workbook . - Prepare part A3,5
- Work in groups . - Practice Write the number - Answer the question .
- Write homework .
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ ..................................................................................... Preparing date: 25/3/2011 Teaching date: 28/3/2011 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES nd Period 82 : B - Come and play ( B1, 2 ) I.Objectives : The students will cotinue to practice about the topic of sports and in modal verbs . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Ought to - Paddles 2.Grammar : Making an invitation : 252 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Would you like to .............? => Yes , lets / Id like to III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette IV.Procedure : Stages Warm up ( 5 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
/ Thats a good idea .
Contents * Find someone who - Have Ss play a game : Find someone Who . Find someone who.............. Name Can play soccer well. Can run quickly . Can play volleyball skillfully . Cant swim quickly . cant play table tennis well. - Remark and lead in new lesson .
Activities - Play a game .
Presentatio * Set the scene: n - Ask Ss to look at the picture and ( 15 mins) answer the question : What are they doing ? - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape - Explain some new words to Ss . + Ought to ( modal verb ) = must + Paddle ( n ) : + The structure : making invitation : Would you like to play table tennis? Id like to . 5. Would you like to + V ? EX : Would you like to come to my house ? Practice have lunch with 253 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the teacher . - Look at the picture and answer - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Listen and write down .
- Make Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th sentences with the structures . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Read - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write in the notebook .
me ? 6. He ought to do his homework before playing table tennis . She ought to help her mother . - Have Ss make sentences with the structures . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers for the questions . - Ask Ss to work in pairs : one asks and one answers. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers : a) He must finish his homework before he plays table tennis . b) Nam will be ready in a few minutes . c) Ba will finish a question for math . d) Ba has 2 paddles . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation. 3.Practice 2: - Ask Ss to make similar dialogues using the cues given in the box replacing the underlined words . Make example : S1: Come and play volleyball. S2: Im sorry . I dont think I can . S1: Thats too bad . Why not ? S2: Well, I should visit my 254
- Practice with the cues . - Listen . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class:
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Productio n ( 8 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
grandmother . S1: Can you play on the weekend ? S2: Yes, I can . S1: All right . See you on Saturday afternoon . S2: Ok. Bye . S1: Bye . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary .
- Give some cues and ask Ss to practice : Homework + Nam / before / soccer / do ( 2 mins) homework . + Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult. + We / after meals / brush teeth . - Make example : S1: What should Nam do before he plays soccer ? Write S2: He must do his homework . homework . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark - Make 3 examples with each structure . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 83,84 in workbook. - Prepare part B2 . V. Self- valuation
255 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ .....................................................................................
UNIT 13 : Period 83rd: I.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will know about a new sport and they continue to practice with modal verbs . Practice reading skill. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Surface - Scuba diving - Underwater - To invent => invention - Pearl diver - Vessel - To explore - Special breathing equipment - Human - Opportunity 256 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 26/3/2011 Teaching date: 30/3/2011 ACTIVITIES B - Come and play ( B3,4,5 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 2.Grammar : Review the modal verbs . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , extra board IV.Procedure Stages Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents * Networks - Have Ss play a game : Networks
G/v : Nguyn Th
Sports
- Have Ss work in groups . - Call 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write . - Remark and lead in new lesson . * Set the scene - Introduce the situation of the lesson and Presentati ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer on the question : what are the pictures ( 15 mins) about ? 1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words to Ss . + Surface ( n ) + Underwater ( n ) + Pearl diver ( n ) = the person who dives underwater and finds the pearls . + To invent ( v => invention ( n ) + Special breathing equipment ( n ) + Scuba- diving ( n ) (picture) + Vessel ( n ) = ship (picture) + To explore ( v ) + Human ( n ) = people + Opportunity ( n ) = chance - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually 257 English 7 2011-2012
- Work in groups - Go to the board and write - Listen to the teacher and look at the pictures , then answer the question . - Listen and write . - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Work in groups - Have Ss read the passage and check - Give the their predictions. predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers and - Read and ask them to correct the false sentences . check the 8. Reading comprehension : Lucky prediction . numbers . - Give the 1) How long could a pearl diver stay answers , underwater? then correct 2) Now, How long can a diver stay the false underwater? sentences 3) LN - Play a game 4) When did Jacques Couteau die? in groups . 5) When did he invent the deep sea diving vessel ? 6) LN 7) What could he study ? 8) How can we explore the oceans now ? - Have Ss work in groups . Post - Ask Ss to complete the passage with the - Complete reading ( 9 modal verbs in the box . the passage . mins) - Have Ss exchange the results with the - Exchange partners . the results - Call on some Ss to give the answer in with the front of the class . partners . - Correct the mistakes . - Give the answers . - Have Ss talk about inventions . - Give some cues : 9. Inventions : + Special breathing equipment . - Talk about Explore the oceans . the Learn about the sea inventions . 258 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
- Correct the pronunciation . 7. Have Ss do exercise : True or False prediction ( Questions in B3 at page 137 ) - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions .
- Do exercise .
G/v : Nguyn Th
EX: Before special breathing equipment we couldnt explore the oceans , we couldnt learn about the sea ...... + Electricity : Read all nights Watch TV Use computers Listen to music Before electricity , we couldnt ...... + The motorbikes : Travel far . Get home quickly . Homework Visit places ( 1 min ) Before motorbike, we couldnt ....... - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give the results in front of the class . - Remark . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 5 at page 86 in workbook . - Prepare unit 14 A1
- Work in groups .
- Give the results in front of the class .
- Write homework .
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ........................................................ ................................................................................................................. ............................ .....................................................................................
259 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 14 : Period 84th I.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , The activities in freetime such as watching TV , playing chess.. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Series - Adventure - Cricket - To sound - to prefer - To guess 2.Grammar : Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to ..................... => Id love to / Im sorry , I cant ............ III.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , picture . IV.Procedure Stages & Time Contents Activities
Preparing date: 27/3/2011 Teaching date: 31/3/2011 FREETIME FUN Lesson 1 : A - Time for TV ( A1 )
260 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Warm up ( 5 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
Practice ( 15 mins)
* Chatting - Chatting with Ss about their freetime by - Answer the some questions : questions . + What do you usually do in your freetime ? + Do you like watching TV? + Do you like watching news in English? + What programs on TV do you like watching? + What is your favorite program? + How much time do you spend watching TV a day ? ........................... - Remark and lead in new lesson . - Look at the picture and * Set the scene listen . - Ask Ss to look at the picture and - Listen to introduce : This is the picture of Hoas the teacher . family . Look at it and guess what they do in their freetime ? do they watch TV? - Introduce the situation : Watching TV is - Listen and one of the most popular activities in write down . freetime . We are going to listen to a Read new dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do words in Lans / Hoas family do in their freetime ? chorus and 1. Vocabulary individually , - Explain some new words to Ss . guess the + Series ( n ) : meanings , + Adventure ( n ) then copy + Cricket ( n ) down . + To prefer ( v ) = to like better - Play a + To sound ( v ) game . + To guess ( v ) = to predict - Guess what - Have Ss read new words in chorus and Lan and Hoa individually do in the - Have them play a game : what and evening . where . - Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa - Look at the usually do in the evening . books , listen - Call on some Ss to give their to the tape 261 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn predictions .
G/v : Nguyn Th and check the predictions. - Give the answer : - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Do exercise . - Exchange Give the answers . - Write down.
Homework ( 2 mins)
- Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best answers . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the key : 2. Comprehension questions a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family . b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner . c) Hoas family doesnt have a TV because her aunt and uncle dont like watching TV. d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle at night . e) Lans family always watches TV in the evening - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Remark .
- Work in pairs . - Some pairs practice in front of the class . - Write homework .
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook . - Prepare part A2 . V. Self- valuation 262 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th Preparing date: 28/3/2011 Teaching date: 2/3/2011 FREETIME FUN Lesson 2 : A - Time for TV ( A2 )
UNIT 14 : Period 85th I.Objectives : The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure Would you like to ...? question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program . Practice speaking skill. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement 2.Grammar : Review : would you like to + V ? III. Teaching aids : Textbook, IV.Procedure : Stages & Time Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents * Slap the board . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . Conc ert Adventur e Movi e Theat er Serie s New s Activities Each group has 3 students to take part in the game. Clap the hands .
- Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in English. - State the group which wins the game . - Remark and lead in new lesson . Presentati on ( 15 mins) - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape . 263 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Listen . - Look at the
G/v : Nguyn Th books and listen to the tape . - Listen and write down . Read new words guess the meanings - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Listen carefully - Look at the advertisemen ts and make up similar dialogues - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Look at the mapped dialogue . Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class Nm hc
Practice ( 15 mins)
1. Vocabulary - Explain some new words : + Cowboy movie ( n ) + Detective movie ( n ) + Pop concert ( n ) + Classical concert ( n ) + Drama ( n ) + Advertisement ( n ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Explain the model sentences : What would you like to watch / see? Id like to watch / see a cowboy movie .
- Ask Ss to look at the advertisements , make up similar dialogues . Production - Have Ss work in pairs . ( 8 mins) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . 2. Mapped dialogue - Give a mapped dialogue : Hoa .Lan Would ....theater? ......good . What would you ........? ....easy life ........ youth theater . Ok ......Tuesday night? Sorry .....E club . How.....Thursday? Ok . Fine, lets ....... - Have Ss work in pairs using mapped 264 English 7 2011-2012
Homework ( 2 mins)
Theat er News Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn
Series
G/v : Nguyn Th
dialogue . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class - Correct the mistake. - Learn by heart new words . - Make a dialogue in the notebook . - Prepare part A3 . V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................ - Write homework .
UNIT 14 : Period 86th I.Objectives : After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty years ago and today . Practice reading skill . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Owner - To change - To gather - Might 2. Grammar : Review the simple present tense and past simple tense . III Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures IV. Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Hangman - Play a game 265 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 28/3/2011 Teaching date: 4/4/2011 FREETIME FUN Lesson 3 : A - Time for TV ( A3,4 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn ( 5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Hangman 3 words : Watch television living room - Have Ss guess the words . - Remark and lead in new lesson .
G/v : Nguyn Th . All class take part in the game - Look at the pictures and say about them . - Listen and write . - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Play a game . - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Exchange the result. - Give the answers . - Some students read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again and find the questions for the answers .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about them . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . 1. Vocabulary + Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV . + To gather ( v ) : + To change ( v ) : + Might ( modal verb ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : what and where . 2. True or false prediction - Ask Ss to do an exercise : True or False prediction. 1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people had TV sets . 2) These TV owners were very popular . 3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs in the evening . 4) Now , they dont spend much time together . 5) A few people have TV sets today . - Have Ss do exercise in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask the rest groups to exchange the results . - Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : 266
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class Read the passage again and complete the summary . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answer in front of the class . - Read the summary aloud . - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen to the tape . - Look at the book and read after the tape . - Read aloud . - Work in groups
Homework ( 2 mins) English 7 2011-2012
1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5.F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . - Give some answers and ask students to find out the questions . 1) No, very few people . 2) The black and white programs . 3) They might sleep a little . 4) No, noone . 5) In their own living room . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and ask students to write down . * Now complete the summary : - Ask students to read the passage again then find the words to complete the summary . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the answer key : 1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular 5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today 9. have 10. life 11. know - Call on some students to read the summary aloud . B. Play with words . - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : what is she doing ? - Play the tape for students . - Ask students to look at the books and read after the tape . - Call on some students to read aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . 267
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Give the ideas in front of the class .
3. Discussion - Have students work in groups discussing the advantanges and disadvantanges of TV . - Call on some groups to present their ideas . - Correct if necessary .
- Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences with them . - Write - Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook homework . . - Prepare part B1,2 . V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................
268 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 14 : Period 87th I.Objectives : The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Sports show - Childrens program - Early news - Weather forecast - The world today - A first ful of dollars 2. Grammar : What kinds of programs do you like ? III. Teaching aids : Textbook , IV. Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Jumbled words ( 5 mins) - Have students play a game : Jumbled - Greetings . words . - Play a + RGMAPOR + VOMEI game . + NEATERGE + REHATTE - Go to the + SUMIC + ODARI board and - Call on 2 students to go to the board write . and write down . - Remark and give marks . * Set the scene Practice - Ask students to look at the picture and ( 15 mins) answer the question: Whats on TV ? - Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then ask students to guess 269 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 2/4/2011 Teaching date: 6/4/2011 FREETIME FUN Lesson 4 : B - Whats on ? ( B1,2 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba likes. - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Have students look at the book and listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on 3or 4 pairs to read - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer : - Ask students to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer Correct and give the correct answers : a. No, she doesnt because there arent many good programs for teenagers . b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and movies . c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries . d. Because they dont play the kind of music she likes . e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book . - Ask students to write in the notebooks . B. Listen . write the times of the programs . - Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 . - Ask them to predict the times of these programs . - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Ask them to listen to the tape and 270
- Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen and guess .- Give the prediction . - Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Read the dialogue again to find the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class.
- Write
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Look at the programs in the book . - Predict the time of the programs . - Give the prediction in front of the class . - Listen to the tape . - Give the answers. - Listen to the tape and check the answers . - Write in the notebooks . - Write . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . Write homework
Homework ( 2 mins)
check their prediction. - Play the tape again for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : a. Childrens programs : 5:oo b. Early News : 6:oo c. Weather forecast : 6:10 d. The world Today : 6: 15 e. Movie : A firstful of dollars : 7:oo - Have students write the answers in the notebooks - Give some cues then ask students to practice asking and answering : + Morning News + Teenagers. + The world of animals . + Music programs . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook . - Prepare part 3,4 .
271 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 14 : Period 88th: I. Objectives : After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to know some more vocabulary about TV programs . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Audience - To contest - Artist - Contestant 272 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 3/4/2011 Teaching date: 7/4/2011 FREETIME FUN Lesson 5 : B- Whats on ? ( B3,4 )
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn - To perform - Folk music - Imports - To include - Satellite - Cable TV 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures, IV. Procedure : Stages & Contents Time Warm up *Noughts and Crosses ( 5 mins) - Have students play a game : Noughts and Crosses Early News Weather forecast Cartoons Movies Sports shows The world today
G/v : Nguyn Th
All class take part in the game .
EX: What kind of programs do you like? I like to watch Early News . - Have students play in 2 groups . - State the group which wins the game. * Set the scene - Ask students to look at the three pictures and identify them . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words : 1. Vocabulary + Audience : The person who watches the shows . + Artist ( n ) : A famous singer . + To perform ( v ) : + To contest ( v ) = To compete 273
- Play game in 2 groups .
- Look at three pictures and identify them . - Listen and write .
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Practice ( 5 mins)
+ Contestant ( n ) = Competitor + Folk music ( n ) : + Imports ( n ) = foreign series . + To include ( v ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Check new words by playing a game called rub out and remember . 2. T or F prediction - Have students do an exercise : T or F prediction . 1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV programs . 2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music . 3. There are contests of knowledge . 4. The contestants are students , workers , TV viewers . 5. Imports are very expensive . - Have students work in groups in 2 minutes . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask students to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F - Have students read the passage aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask students to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions in the books . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class 3. Comprehension questions - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers . a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite Name Pop music Contest Imports others 274 Lan Hoa
Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .
- Play a game . _ Do an exercise .
- Work in groups . - give the prediction . Listen to the tape and check . - Give the answers in front of the
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th class - Read the passage aloud . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Read the words in the box . - Listen and write - Complete the passage . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Take a survey . - Listen . - Work in groups - Write homework .
artists . b. They are students , workers or family members . c. Imports usually include police and hospitals . Production d. Students answer. ( 9 mins) B. Write. Complete the passage . Use the words in the box . - Ask students to look at the words in the box and read them aloud . - Explain some new words to students . + To be possible : the same meaning with Can. + Satellite ( n ) : + Cable TV ( n ) : - Have students complete the passage , using the words in the box . - Ask students to exchange the results with the
Homework (1 min) partners . - Call on some students to give the results in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen 4. Series 5. Show 6. Like 7. Station 8. Receive 9. Cities 10 . Possible - Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud . * Survey - Have students take a survey : Ex: S1: Do you want to hear pop music ? 275 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
S2: Yes, I do./ No, I dont . Or : S1: What TV programs do you want to see? S2: I want to see the contests . _ Have students work in groups . ( Each group has a secretary ) - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook . - Review for doing a test in the next lesson . V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ............................................................................
Period 89th: English 7 2011-2012
Preparing date: 6/4/2011 Teaching date: 9/4/2011 Writen test 276 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
I. Objectives: The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will know each student and classs knowledge and have the method to teach. II. Preparing : - Teacher : prepare a written test - Students: Review III. Test IV Ma trn Ch Nhn bit Thng Vn dng Tng hiu TN TL TN TL Tn TL I. 5 5 Pronunciatio 1,25 1, n 25 II. Language focus III. Reading IV.Writing Tng 5 1,25 15 3,75 10 5 10 10 5 2,5 1,25 5 2,5 5 2,5 30 15 3,75 5 2,5 5 2,5
III. Content : A. Pronunciation 1. A. plate B. athletics C. band D. pan 2. A. dive B. slice C. lifestyle D. wrist 3. A. energy B. net C. selection D. edge 4. A. moderate B. contestant C. competition D. chopstick 5. A. chopstick B. touch C. catch D. stomatch B. Language focus I. Choose the best answer 1. In the evening , all the family members....................in the living room to watch TV A. spend B. gather C. come D. gathers 2. There is a wide .................of programs on TV nowadays 277 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
A. various B. variety C. many D. a lot of 3. We............on holiday to England last year A. go B. goes C. went D. to go 4. He plays tennis..................... A. skillful B. quick C. skillfully D. careful 5. I dont like TV programs, I prefer to ....................to the radio A. hear B. see C. listen D. watch 6 . Hes a ............................soccer player A. good B. carefully C. quickly D. well 7. There s one satellite TV.............................that shows only films A. station B. game C. house D. area 8. We may know the land very well, but we know very ..............about the oceans A. many B. much C. little D. lot 9. What................ you like to have for dinner tonight ,Nam ? A. would B. should C. do D. ought 10. He was busy yesterday and ..................were his brothers A. neither B. either C. so D. too II. Give correct form of the words in the parrentheses 1. I saw an .....................................film on TV last night (interest) 2. Playing soccer in the street is very ................................( danger) 3. He speaks English very...................................................( quick) 4. Sugar is not ...................................food because we need it to live ( health) 5. Children behave very.....................................( good) C. Reading Read the passage then choose True (T) or false (f) Nowadays , football bocomes one of the worlds most popular games. Millions of people play and watch it all around the world. A football match often has two parts. Each part is forty-five minutes . The first part is the first half and the second part is the second half . There is a fifteen -minutes break between the two halves. There are two teams in a football match . Each football team has eleven players , including a goal-keeper. The players on the ground try to kick the ball into the others goal. The team which scores more goals win the match. 1. Today,football bocomes very popular all around the world. .................. 278 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
2. Millions of people play football .................. 3. A football match often has two halves of forty-five minutes each ................. 4. There is no break in a fotball match ................. 5. The winning is the team scores more goals ................. D. Writing Rearrange the words to make a meaningful sentence 1. would / tonight / to / to / movies / like/ you/ the/ with/ me / go ? ............................................................................................................... ....................... 2. do/ what/ parents/ not/ want/ understand/ sometimes/ their/ children/. ............................................................................................................... ....................... 3. know/ we/ our/ that/ eat/ food/ affects/ we/ life/ the/ ............................................................................................................... ...................... 4. a / bought/ my/ lot/ friends/ gifts/ for/of/ ............................................................................................................... ..................... 5. most/ football/ in /is/ the / the/ world/ sport/ popular/ ............................................................................................................... .................... Preparing date: 6/4/2011 Teaching date: 9/4/2011 Period 90th
Correcting the test
I / Aims : Students can summarize the knowledge they have learnt and know how to improve their knowledge of English . II / Teaching aids : Test papers , chalk , boards III / Procedures : T calls students to give the resunts Correct and give the real answers Answer keys : A 1A 2D 3C 4B 5D 279 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
B. I. 1 B 6A 2B 7A 3C 8C 4C 9A 5C 10 C II. 1, interesting 2, dangerous 3, quickly 4, unhealthy 5, well C. 1. T 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. T D. 1. Would you like to the movies theater with me tonight ? 2. Parents dont sometimes understand what their children want 3. We know that the food we eat affects our life 4. I bought a lot of gifts for my friends 5. Football is the most popular sport in the world. IV. Remark and homework : Prepare unit 15 A1 . Preparing date: 9/4/2010 Teaching date: 13/4/2011 GOING OUT Lesson 1 : A - Video games ( A1 )
UNIT 15 : Period 91st: I. Objectives : After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and disadvantages of playing video games . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : 280 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive 2. Grammar : Structure : Dont spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I wont . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, sub- board . IV. Procedure : Stages & Contents Activities Time Warm up * Networks - Greetings . ( 5 mins) - Have Ss play a game : Networks . - Play a game . Entertainm ents 2 groups take part in the game . Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the board and write down . - Listen and answer the question . - Listen and write .
- Have Ss play game in 2 groups . - Remark and lead in new lesson . * Set the scene: - Introduce the situation of the lesson , Presentatio then ask Ss to look at the picture and n answer the question : ( 15 mins) What can you see in the picture ? 1. Vocabulary - Introduce some new words : + Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can go to play some games for relaxing . + Video games ( n ) : + Arcade ( n ) : + Addictive ( adj ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . * Check vocab: What and where - Have students play a game : what and Practice where . ( 15 mins) - Have students look at the dialogue and 281 English 7 2011-2012
- Read new words .
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th - Play a game . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Listen . - Make examples as model . - Find the answers for the questions - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - go to the board and write the answers . - Write in the notebooks - Look at the mapped dialogue . - Work in
listen to the tape . - Ask students to read after the tape . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce the new model sentence : + Dont spend too much of your time in the arcade. => No, I wont . ( Advise somebody not to do something .) - Ask students to make examples as model . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book . - Have students work in pairs . 2. Comprehension questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers . - Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . a. Hes going to the amusement center . b. Hes going to play video games . c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week . d. No, he doesnt . e. He usually stays for about an hour . f. Because video games can be addictive . g. He will do his homework later . 3. Map dialogue - Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at carefully . YOU YOUR FRIEND 282
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Where ......going ? center What ..........do? How often ? Homework ( 1 min)
G/v : Nguyn Th Amusement video games 2/ week pairs . - Practice in front of the class .
Dont spend ....... video games .... Dont forget ........ homework . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . - Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2 sentences with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook . - Prepare part A2,3 .
- Write homework .
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ..
283 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 15 : Period 92nd: I. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing video games . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises - To develop - Robbery - To identify - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, pictures . IV. Procedures : Stages Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents * Chatting - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like playing video games ? + How often do you play video games ? + How long do you usually spend playing 284 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc Activities - Greetings . - Answer Ts questions .
Preparing date: 10/4/2011 Teaching date: 14/4/2011 GOING OUT Lesson 1 : A - Video games ( A2,3 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
video games? + What do you think about playing video games ? ................................... - Remark and lead in new lesson . * Set the scene: - Introduce the situation of the lesson 1. Vocabulary: - Inventor (n) : nh pht minh - Social skill (n): k nng giao tip - Dizzy (adj) : chong vng - Premises (n): t ai, nh ca - To develop (v) : pht trin - Robbery(n): tn trm - To identify (v): nhn thy - Industry (n): nn cng nghip - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . * Check vocab: What and where - Have students play a game : what and where . 2. True / false prediction: - Ask students to do an exercise : True or False prediction 1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun . 2. It s very good for children to spend too much time on their own . 3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired . 4. Children mustnt play outdoors with their friends . 5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young . - Have students work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction. - Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their 285
- Listen and write . - Read new words .
- Listen and do exercise - Work in groups - Give the prediction . - Listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Give the answers .
While reading ( 18 mins) English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th tape again .
prediction . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T - Ask students to read the text in silent . - call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . 3. Choose the best answer (Now answer , complete the sentences ). - Have students read the text again to find out the answers . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a) Many young people play video games . b) Some inventors of video games become very rich c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends . d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games . - Have students write in the notebooks . 4. Gap-filling Complete the passage with the words in the box . - Explain the request of the exercise - Have students complete the passage . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Correct and give the key : 1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are 286
- Read the passage in silent - Read aloud . - Read the passage again to find the answers - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers .
- Write down .
- Exchange the results . - Give the answers . - Read aloud . - Write .
- Work in groups
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy Homework 10. show ( 1 min) - Call on 2 students to read the . completed passage aloud - Ask students to write down .
G/v : Nguyn Th
Demonstrate the ideas . - Write homework .
5. Discussion: - Have students work in groups discussing about the disadvantages of playing video games . - Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in front of the class . - Remark . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 in workbook . - Prepare the next lesson . V. Self- valuation
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ..
287 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 15 : Period 93rd: I. Objectives : After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, Pictures about the city and the country . IV. Procedures : Stages Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents * Wordsquare - Have students play a game : Wordsquare . H N O S O I D O M R C C Z E R G Z O L K S J B U S Y R H B J M K G Z V N Y I W Q T T E Discuss in groups to find the words which relate to the city and the country . - Work in groups . Activities - Play a game .
Preparing date: 9/4/2011 Teaching date: 15/4/2011 GOING OUT B - In the city ( B1,2 )
- Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and country . - Have students work in groups . -Remark and lead in new lesson . 288 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Presentatio * Set the scene: n - Ask students to look at the picture and ( 15 mins) answer the question : What is the picture about ? - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Why / why not ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson . 1. Vocabulary: - Introduce some new words to students : + The rest ( n ) : s ngh ngi + Awake ( adj ) : thc gic + To scare ( v ) : s + To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N : thch nghi vi + Direction ( n ) : s ch dn - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : rub out and remember . - Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country . 2. Brainstorming : Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic ................ .................. Practice - Have students work in groups . ( 16 mins) - Call on some groups to give their ideas . - Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country . - Play the tape for students . - Have students read the dialogue in pairs . 289 English 7 2011-2012
- Look at the picture and answer the question . - Answer Ts questions . - Listen . - Listen and write . - Read new words in chorus and individually
- Play a game . - Discuss about life in the city and life in the country . Work in groups - Give the ideas
- Look at the book and listen to the tape - Work in pairs reading
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th the dialogue . - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class . - Find the answers . - Play a game in 2 groups .
Homework ( 1 min)
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions . 3. Comprehension questions - Have students play a game : Lucky numbers 1. Where did Hoa live before ? 2. Why doesnt Hoa like the city ? 3. LN . 4. What does Hoa do in the evening ? 5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ? 6. Does She like the city ? 7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue? - Remark and ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . - Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs discussing about life in the city and life in the country . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct and remark. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books - Prepare part B 3 .
- Discuss Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework .
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 290 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ..
UNIT 15 : Period 94th I. Objectives : After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : 291 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 16/4/2011 Teaching date: 18/4/2011 GOING OUT Lesson 4 : B - In the city ( B 3 )
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund III. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . IV. Teaching Procedures : Stages Warm up ( 5 mins) Contents * Networks - Have students play a game : Networks Activities - Greetings . - Play a game . - Work in groups . - Go to the board and write .
City
Country
- Have students work in groups . - Have students go to the board and write . - Remark . * Set the scene: - Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa got used to the city life . 1. Vocabulary - Introduce new words : + Rarely ( adv ) : + To socialize ( v ) : + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her friends . Like / prefer + gerund . Ex: Hoa like playing chess very much . - Ask students to make sentences as model . - Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do . - Have students read the text in silent . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Call on some students to read the text 292
- Listen . - Listen and write . - Make sentences . - Answer the questions . - Read the text and find out what she could do . - Read in silent . - Give the answers in
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th front of the class . - Read the text aloud . - Work in pairs . - Ask and answer in front of the class . - Make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening . - Exchange the results . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Go to the board and write - Write in the notebooks . - Listen to the teacher . - Give the activity of each picture . - Guess and write the names next to the
aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . 2. Comprehension questions - Give some more questions and ask students to answer : a) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ? b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening ? c) Why couldnt Hoa read many books in her village ? d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasnt so bad after all ? - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . - Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present tense . - Have students exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class . - Call one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks . B. Listen . Match each name to an activity . - Introduce the aim of the listening . - Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of each picture . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures . - Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction . 293 English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th pictures . - Listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Listen. - Give the answers in front of the class . - Check the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .
Homework ( 2 mins)
- Play the tape for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key : Ba- b Hoa- a Nga d Nam c Lan f An e 3. Discussion - Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Remark . - Write the things that you often do in the evening . - Do exercises in part B in workbook . - Prepare unit 15 B4,5.
- Write homework . V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ..
294 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 15 : Period 95th I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to describe and compare city and village lifestyles. II. Language contents: * Grammar: Review: The past simple tense. * Vocabulary: Play table tennis, see a movie, go to the restaurant, play chess, listen to music (CDs), watch a soccer match. III. Teaching aids: A cassette player, pictures, extraboard. IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up *Chatting: ( 5 mins) -What do you do in the evening? -Do you like the city? Why? Why not? -Do you like the countryside? Why? Why not?
Preparing date: 17/4/2011 Teaching date:20/4/2011 GOING OUT Lesson 4 : B - In the city ( B 4 )
295 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Pre listening ( 15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
1. vocabulary: - play table tennis: chi bng bn (picture) - see a movie: xem phim (picture) - go to the restaurant: i n nh hng (picture) - play chess: chi c vua (picture) - listen to music (CDs): nghe nhc (picture) - watch a soccer match: xem trn u bng - - --- Call on some students read aloud in front of the class. * Checking vocabulary: Slap the board. tennis listen movie musi c chess
- Students read chorally.
2.Grammar: Yesterday evening, I played table tennis. 3. Open prediction: -Ask students to predict to match each name to an activity. Ba Lan Hoa An Nga Nam
296 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
-Give feedback
- Get ss to listen twice firstly, then check their predictions. - T calls some ss to show out the answer and correct. - Listen and check the prediction: * Answer key: Ba - b Hoa - a Nga d Nam - c Lan - f An - e 4.Write it up: -Ask students to write sentences describing what each of those people does. *Asking and answering: -Ask students to ask and answer question about those people. Example: + What does Ba do every afternoon? + He usually plays table tennis with his friends. + What does Nga do every afternoon? + She often plays chess with her father. 297
- Listen to the tape carefully - Listen and check the predictio ns
Post listening ( 9 mins)
- Answer the questions and describe each person
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Homework - Learn vocabulary. ( 1 min) - Do exercise: Unit 15: B4.p/98 - Prepare the next lesson: Unit 6: (A Prepring date: 18 4/2011 Teaching date: 22/4/2011
G/v : Nguyn Th Whole class
UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES th Period 96 : Lesson 1: Famous places in Asia ( A 1,2 ) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know name countries and their capital cities. II. Language contents: * Grammar: Form: S + adv of frequency + Ordinary verbs. *Vocabulary: Greeting from Bangkok, Bangkok, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Jakarta, Phonom Penh, Vientiane, Yangon, Beijing. III. Teaching aids: A cassette player, pictures, extraboard. IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Matching ( 5 mins) 1. Bangkok - Do 2. Kuala Lumpur matching 3. Singapore 4. Jakarta 5. Phonom Penh 6. Vientiane 7. Yangon a. Malaysia b. Thai lan c. Indonesia d. Singapore e. Myanmar f. Cambodia g. Laos * Answer key: 1 - b; 2 - a; 3 - d; 4 - c; 5 - f; 6 - g; 7 - e. Presentatio 1. Vocabulary: - Read new n -Greeting from Bangkok: li cho t words in 298 English 7 Nm hc 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .
Bng cc (translation) -Bangkok (n): Bng cc - Th Thi lan (picture) -Kuala Lumpur (n): Ma la xi a (picture) -Singapore (n): Xin ga po (picture) -Jakarta (n) : Th In n xi a (picture) -Phonom Penh (n): Th Cam pu chia (picture) -Vientiane (n): Th Lo (picture) -Yangon (n): Th Mi an ma (picture) -Beijing (n): Trung Quc (picture) -Its his job to fly there: cng vic ca ch l bay n (translation) -Ocasionally (adv): thnh thong (real) - Students read chorally. - Teacher call on some students read aloud in front of the class. * Checking vocabulary: What and where. Bangk Beijin Jakart ok g a Yango n 2. 3. Vienti ane
2. Grammar: Sometimes he flies to Kuala Lumpur, or Singapore or Jakarta.
299 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Presentation dialogue: A 1 on page 154. * Sets the scene: Hoa and Ba are talking about famous places in Asia. - Asks Ss to read the dialogue and then draw out sentences in the present simple with adverbs of frequency. He usually flies to Hong Kong. He sometimes goes to Phnom Penh. a. Listen. Then practice with a partner: - Get the student to listen to the tape twice. - Ask the student to work in pair to read the dialogue. - Have them reread the dialogue. - Asks Ss to do the matching ( a- f ) on page 155. - Work in - Gives feedback. pairs to * Answer key : a-D, b-F, c-B, d-C, e-A, fcomplete E. the table, b. Complete the table. Use the match the names of the countries in the box: - Asks Ss to work in pairs to complete names of the table, match the names of the the countries in the box. countries - Give feedback. in the box. * Answer key: Capital Country Bangkok Thailand Beijing China 300 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Practice (15 mins)
G/v : Nguyn Th
Kuala Malaysia Lumpur Phnom Cambodia Penh Vientiane Laos Yang on Myanmar Jakarta Indonesia * Now ask and answer questions with a partner: - Teachers models with a good student first. S1 : Where does Bas Uncle fly to ? S2 : He usually/ sometimes/ ... flies to (Bangkok). S1 :Where is it ? S2 :Its in (Thailand) - Then asks Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue using the table A2. Production (7 mins) Homework (2 mins) T review to know name countries and their capital cities. - Learn vocabulary + grammar.Practice: A1 - Do exercise: Unit 16: A1,2.p/99.100Prepare the next lesson: Unit 16: (A3,4).
- Work pairs ask and answer questions with a partner:
in
Whole class Whole class
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................
Preparing date: 22/4/2011 301 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 16: Period 97th: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to. Discuss vacation destinations. Talk about tourist attractions in VN. II. Language contents: . 1.Vocabulary: Pilot, stay overnight, cultural show, balinese dancers, attraction, ancient amonuments, puppet shows, resort, colorful corals. 2.Grammar: Modal verb: May III. Teaching aids: A cassette player, pictures. IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up *Use the adverbs of frequency in the Whole ( 5 mins) class correct place: 1)Im at home on Sunday. (always) 2)Bas uncle flies to Hong Kong as well as Bangkok. (usually) 3)He can find time for reading. ( seldom) 4)They dont stay up late. (often) 5)You must do that again. (never) 6)Fast food is good. (rarely) * Answer key: 1)Im always at home on Sunday. 2)Bas usually uncle flies to Hong Kong as well as Bangkok. 3)He can seldom find time for reading. 4)They dont often stay up late. 5)You must never do that again. 6)Fast food is rarely good. Presentat 1. Vocabulary: ion -pilot (n): phi cng ( 15 mins) (explanation) 302 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Read new words in
Teaching date: 25/4/2011 PEOPLE AND PLACES Lesson2: Famous places in Asia (A3,4)
G/v : Nguyn Th chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .
-stay overnight: qua m (translation) -cultural show: bui biu din vn ha (translation) -balinese dancers: cc ngh s khiu v o Bali (situation) -attraction (n): s hp dn (explanation) -ancient monuments: nhng lng m c (translation) -puppet shows: bui biu din ma ri (translation) -resort (n): khu ngh mt (situation) -colorful corals: nhng o san h y mu sc (translation) - Students read chorally. -Teacher call on some students read aloud in front of the class. * Checking vocabulary: Slap the board. cultur dance attract al r ion sho pupp w et 4. 2. Grammar: 5. You may be interested in the attractions of different 6. cultures. You may prefer the ocean. Practice ( 16 mins) - Get the student to listen to the tape twice. - Asks Ss to read the text about destinations on page 156 and check if their answers are correct or not. * Answer key: Monday Bangkok and Singapore Tuesday Singapore Wednesd Jakarta ay 303 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the tape twice. - Give the anwers
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Thursday Bali Friday Hong Kong Saturday Hong Kong Sunday Back to Ha Noi - Introduce the content of the lesson. - Listen to - Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice. the tape - Ask Ss to read the passage and answer the twice questions. - answer - Ask Ss some questions. the - Ss anwer the questions and then practice in question pairs s * Answer key: a. The three kinds of tourist attractions mentioned in the passage are ancient monuments, shows and resorts. b. I prefer the traditions of different cultures. ( according to Ss). Productio n( 8 mins) Matching. - Do - Gives Ss 3 kinds of tourist attactions that matchin go with the activities. g 3 kinds of Activities tourist attraction 1. Ancient a. You can swim and dive. monument b. You may visit the Khmer temples of Angkor Watt. 2. Shows. c. You can see colorful dances or shadow puppet shows. 3. Resorts d. You may admire colorful corals and and fish. beaches e. You can listen to and enjoy traditional music during the performances. f. You can sail and enjoy a healthy outdoor life. - Asks Ss to match 3 kinds of tourist attractions with suitable activities. 304 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Lets them work in pairs to compare their answers. - Gives feedback. * Answer key: 1-b; 2-c,e; 3-a,d,f. Homewor k ( 1 min) -Learn vocabulary + grammar. -Review: B3. -Do exercise: Unit 16: A3,4,5.p/100,101 -Prepare the next lesson: Unit 16 (B1,2). Whole class
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................
UNIT 16: Period 98th: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn about the famous people and the histories event. II. Language contents: . 1. Grammar: Can I have.......?/ Could I have...........?. 2. Vocabulary: History quiz, general, be famous for, lead, peoples Army of Vietnam, commander - in - chief, force, defeat, be good at, be interested in. III. Teaching aids: A cassette player, pictures. IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Kims game Pilot, stay overnight, cultural show, ( 5 mins) balinese dancers, attraction, ancient 305 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Preparing date: 30/4/2011 Teaching date: 4/5/2011 PEOPLE AND PLACES Lesson3: Famous people (B1,2,3)
G/v : Nguyn Th
amonuments, puppet shows, resort, colorful corals. Pre listening ( 15 mins) 1. Vocabulary: -History quiz: cuc thi lch s (situation) -general (adj): ni trung (visual) -be famous for: ni ting v (translation) -lead (v): lnh o (real) -peoples Army of Vietnam: qun i nhn dn VN (translation) -commander - in - chief: tng ch huy (translation) -force (n): lc lng (explanation) -defeat (v): nh bi (real) -be good at: gii v (situation) -be interested in: qun tm n (situation) -Students read chorally. -Teacher call on some students read aloud in front of the class. - Check vocabulary: What and where. 2. Grammar: Can I have these postcard, please? Can I borrow some of them? 3. Open prediction:(True/False statements prediction) (B1- P. 158) - Sets the scene: Ba and Liz are talking about Vo Nguyen Giap, guess which statement is true , which statement is false. - Give feedback. - Listen . - Listen and write
- Read new words in chorus and individually
- Guess the statements
While listening English 7 2011-2012
- Asks Ss to listen to the tape twice - Listen to the tape and check their prediction. 306 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th carefully - Listen and check the predictions - Write the answers
- Asks Ss to compare with their partners and correct the false statements. - Give feedback and corrects. * Answer key: a.F => Liz doesnt know about General Giap. b.F => The peoples Army of Vietnam defeated the French in 1954. c.T. d.F => Genaral Giap was born in 1911. e.T. f.F => Ba will lend Liz some history books. 4. Fill in the form: - Asks Ss to listen again and fill in the form. Name: Year of birth: Job: Famous: The battle: - Give feedback. * Answer key: Name: Vo Nguyen Giap. Year of birth: 1911. Job:General/Commander in chief. Famous for: Leading the peoples Army of Vietnam The battle: Dien Bien Phu. - Asks Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue. - Corrects their pronunciation. 5. Write it up: 307
- Listen again and fill in the form
- Work in pairs to practice the dialogue. Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Asks Ss to write a short paragraph - Write a about General Vo Nguyen Giap, using short the cues form the form and the paragraph dialogue. about General Vo a) Complete the dialogue with the Nguyen words in the box: Giap * Answer key: - Complete a)1.like the 2.prefer dialogue 3.guess with the 4.favorite words in b)Make a new dialogue about the box famous people using the adj in the box. - Make a new dialogue about famous people using the adj in the box. Whole class
Homework ( 2 mins)
-Learn vocabulary + grammar. -Practice: B1. -Do exercise: Unit 16: B1,2.p/102. -Prepare the next lesson: Unit 16 (B4).
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................
308 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 16: Period 99th: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn about the famous people and the histories event. II. Language contents: . 1.Vocabulary: Invent, electric light bulb, power station, gramophone, motion pictures, novel, poetry, fairy tales. 2. Grammar: Past Simple tense. III. Teaching aids: A cassette player, pictures. IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Chatting Whole class a.Whos this ? ( 5 mins) b.What do you know about him ? Pre reading ( 15 mins) 1. Vocabulary: - invention (n): pht minh (explanation) - electric light bulb: bng n in (translation) -power station: nh my pht in (situation) -gramophone (n): my quay a (explanation) 309 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Listen to the teacher carefully - Read new words in chorus and individually
Preparing date: 1/5/2011 Teaching date: 5/5/2011 PEOPLE AND PLACES Lesson4: Famous people (B4)
G/v : Nguyn Th
-motion pictures: phim in nh (situation) -novel (n): tiu thuyt (situation) -poetry (n): th ca (explanation) -fairy tales: truyn c tch (translation) - Students read chorally. - Teacher call on some students read aloud in front of the class. * Checking vocabulary: Slap the board. electri c inventio n station moitio n nov el
- Guess the statements
2. Grammar: Thomas Edison was an inventor. He invented electric light bulb. 3. Open prediction: a. How many things did Thomas Edison invent during his lifetime b. What was Hans Christian Andersen famous for? While reading ( 15 mins) - Read and 4.Read and check the prediction: give answer * Answer key: key 1-During his lifetime he invented over 1,300 things including the gramophone and motion pictures. 2- Hans Christian Andersen was famous for the fairy tales he wrote between . *Anwser given: -Give students some sentences and ask them to make the questions. 310 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Work in a)Thomas Edison was born in 1847 class b)He died in 1931 c)Yes.He also established the first central power station in New York City. d)No.I was born in America e)Where was Hans Christian Andersen from? f)Yes. He wrote novels,plays,poetry and travel books. g)No.He gew up in a poor family Post reading ( 8 mins) 5.Speaking: - Ask students to do exercise a and b/p.160 a) One of you is Student A and the other is Student B. Look at the information. -StudentA: You are a newspaper reporter. Imagine you are going to interview Thomas Edison. Ask many questions as possible. -Student B:You are Thomas Edison. A newspaper reporter is going to interview you. Use the information in the reading passage to answer the questions. Eg: +Where were you born? I was born in 1847. +Were you born in America? Yes, I was. b)Now change roles. Student A is Hans Christian Andersen. Student B is the reporter. Complete the interview. Homework -Learn vocabulary + grammar. 311 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc - Work in pairs and do exercise a and b/p.160
Whole class
G/v : Nguyn Th
-Review: B4 -Do exercise: Unit 16: B3.p/103. -Prepare the next lesson: Unit 16 (B5).
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................
Preparing date: 3/5/2011 Teaching date: 9/5/2011 312 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES th Period 100 : Lesson5: Famous people (B5) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the famous people and the histories event. II. Language contents: . 1.Vocabulary: Founded Vietnamese Communist Party, Formed Viet Minh Front, became President, Nghe An Province, in the early 1900s, indochinese Communist Party, declare independence. 2. Grammar: Past Simple tense. III. Teaching aids: A cassette player, pictures.extra board IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up Whole class *Chatting (About Ho Chi Minh) ( 5 mins) -When and where was Uncle Ho born? -Have you ever visited Uncle Hos Mausoleum? -What do you think about his life? -What did he teach Vietnamese children? Pre listening ( 15 mins) 1. Vocabulary: - Listen to -Founded Vietnamese Communist the Party: thnh lp ng Cng Sn VN teacher (situation) carefully -Formed Viet Minh Front: thnh lp Mt trn Vit Minh (translation) -became President: tr thnh ch tch (example) -Nghe An Province: tnh Ngh An (explanation) -in the early 1900s: vo u nhng nm 1900 (situation) -Indochinese Communist Party: ng - Read new Cng Sn ng Dng (situation) -Declare independence: tuyn b c words in lp (explanation) chorus and - Students read chorally. 313 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
- Teacher call on some students read individuall aloud in front of the class. y * Checking vocabulary: What and where. found beca Party ed me preside provin - Write nt ce - Predict to 2. Grammar: Ho Chi Minh was born in complete 1890 in Nghe An Province, in the village the table of Kim Lien. 3. Open prediction: -Ask students to predict to complete the table -Elicit the answer from students and write some of them on the board. Ho Chi Minh Year Place Date of birth 1890 Kim Ien Left Viet Nam Worked in a hotel 1900 s Went to another country Moved again 1923 Moscow Founded 1930 Vietnamese Communist Party Formed Viet Minh Viet front Nam BecamePresident Died -Give feedback While listening ( 15 mins) English 7 2011-2012 Listen and check the prediction Ho Chi Minh Year Place Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien 314 Nm hc - Listen and check the prediction
G/v : Nguyn Th
Left Viet Nam 1911 Sai gon Worked in a 1900 London hotel s Went to another 1917 Paris country Moved again 1923 Moscow Founded 1930 Guangzh Vietnamese ou Communist Party Formed Viet 1941 Viet Nam Minh front BecamePresiden 1946 Ha noi t Died 1969 Ha noi *Write it up: -Ask students to use the information in the table to write a paragraph about Ho Chi Minhs life. Eg: Uncle Ho was born in 1890 in Kim Lien village.He left Viet Nam in 1911 from Nha Rong Habour in Sai gon -Ask some students to read aloud their writing in front of the class. - Learn vocabulary. - Review: B5. - Do exercise: Unit 16: B4.p/103. - Prepare the next lesson: Language focus 5.
Write a paragraph about Ho Chi Minhs life.
Homework ( 2 mins)
Whole class
V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................................... 315 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 101 : LANGUAGE FOCUS 5 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to master the old knowledge. II. Language contents: . 1.Vocabulary: Review. 2. Grammar: Adjective and adverbs, modal verbs, expressing likes and dislikes, tenses and because. III. Teaching aids: pictures.extra board IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activitie s Warm Pelmanism: ADJ and ADV of manner up ( 5 mins) dangerou slow skillful goo bad quick
st
Preparing date: 04/5/2010
316 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
s d dangerou slowl skillfull wel badl quickl sly y y l y y Review 4.LF1:Adjectives and adverbs: and a)Presentation. Practice *Models: He is a good soccer player. He plays ( 32 socer very well mins) *Check (Form,use,) b)Practice: Complete the sentences. Answer key:A-quickly; B-slowly; C-good; Ddangerous; E-skillful 5.LF2: Modal Verbs: a)Presentation: *Models: Can I go to the movies? Hoa should stay in bed *Check(Form,use,) b)Practice. *Role play: Ask students to play the roles of Ba and his mom to practice the dialogue/P162 *Speaking: Ask students to look at the picture and the words to make up similar dialogues -Can I play soccer ,Mom? -No,you cant. -Please,Mom! -First you must play the piano.Then you can play soccer. -Great!Thanks,Mom *Speaking: Hoa has a few problems.Give her some advice,using should and ought to 6.LF3: Espressing likes and dislikes: a)Presentation: -Id like -I prefer No,I dont like 317 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the teacher - Comple te the senten ces
- Listen to the teacher - Work in pairs and play the roles
- Listen
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th to the teacher - Work in pairs
-I dont really like -I dont know Yes.That sounds nice. b)Practice: Ask students to work with a partner, look at the menu and decide which items to order Eg: -What would you like to eat? -Id like spring roll -Would you like beef salad? -No,I dont like beef salad. 7.LF4: Tenses: a)Presetation: Models:-I learn English at school. Now I am learning English with my sister.Yesterday I learned English in the library. Tomorrow I will go to the English speaking club. b)Practice: Ask students to read the sentences and check the column Answer key: -Past: c,e,h -Present:a,b,f,g,i Future:d,j 8.LF5: Because: a)Presentation: Models: -What is your favorite color?-Red.-Why?Because it is lucky. b)Practice: Ask students to work with a partner,make up similar dialogue, use the words in the table and the box.
- Listen to the teacher - Read the senten ces and check the column -
Producti Role play Work in on b)Practice: Ask students to work with a pairs ( 7 mins) partner,make up similar dialogue, use the words in the table and the box. Homew ork English 7 2011-2012 Review: Language focus 5 Prepare the next lesson: Revision. 318 Nm hc Whole class
G/v : Nguyn Th
(1 min) V. Self- valuation ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................................... Preparing date: 04/5/2010 Period 102nd: REVISION I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do some exercises to prepare for the final test. II. Language contents: . 1. Vocabulary: Review. 2. Grammar: Review. III. Teaching aids: pictures.extra board IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Networks Work in ( 5 mins) groups
What do you play after school?
Review ( 10 mins)
1. Present simple Form S + V(s-es) Use with : Everyday, usually, after school never, often, sometimes, always Ex: We usually go to school in the morning 2. Present progressive: 319
- Listen to the teacher. - Take notes. Give examples - Listen to the teacher. - Take notes. Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Form
G/v : Nguyn Th - Give examples
S + am- is- are + V- ing Use with : Now ,at the presentat the moment - Look! Listen! EX: Look ! The teacher is coming My father is waching TV in his - Listen to the room now teacher. - Take notes. 3.Past simple Give Use: The past simple tense expresses an examples action that completely finished in the past. This tense always goes with: yesterday, last night/ week/ year, ago..... Listen to the teacher. Form: S + Ved/ V2. - Take notes. S + didnt + V. - Give Did + S + V? examples Ex: -Mrs. Mai bought the material. -Mrs. Mai didn buy the material. -Did Mrs Mai buy the material? -What did Mrs. Mai do for Hoa? 4.Asking the price - How much is it? Its 15,000dong - How far is it from the shoes store to the - Listen to the mini mart? Its 500 meters teacher. 5.Intended Future - Take notes. Form - Give S + am/ is/ are + going to +V-inf examples 1. Din t k hoch d nh - Iam going to visit New York this summer. 2. S suy on chn chn da vo cn c hin ti - There are a lot of clouds. I think it is going to rain. - Listen to the 6. Future Simple teacher. Form - Take notes. S+ will + V1 1. nh ngay khi ni hay hnh ng s xy ra - Give examples tng lai khng ph thuc vo nh: - He will come here tomorrow. 320 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
2. kin, li ha, hy vng, pht biu v mt hnh ng trong tng lai: (think, promise, hope, expect..) - Wait here and I will get you a drink. - I think you will pass the exam 7. So, too , either, neither Ex: Im in class 7A Im ,too So am I Ex: I dont like bananas I dont , either Neither do I 8. Preposition a. Preposition of place b. Preposition of time Practice ( 24 mins) I. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY Choose the best answer: 1. After class, Nam goes home and ________ videos. a. watch b. watching c.watches d. to watch 2. A running nose , a slight fever, coughing and sneezing are the __ of the common cold. a.symtoms b. deseases c. sickness d. illness 3.Sugar gives us __________ and we fell less hungry. a.power b. health c.energy d. happy 4.Is your __________ one meter forty centimeters? a.weight b.height c.body d. tall 5.Ha likes candy. ______ do we. a.Neither b.so c. either d. too 6.Lets ___________ to the zoo. a.gone b.going c.go d. to go 321 English 7 2011-2012
- Listen to the teacher. - Take notes. - Give example
Read ten sentences and then complete.
- Choose the best answers.
Correct in their paper
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
7.He is a good teacher. He teaches very ______________. a.bad b.well c.good d. fast 8. General Giaps Forces defeated the ________ in 1954. a. American b. French c.Japanese d. China 9.Millions of young people play____________________. a.chess b.musical instrument c. video games d. football 10.We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to Jacques Cousteaus __ a. action b.invention c. composition d. introduction Give the correct tense of the verbs in blanks to complete the following sentences 1- She learns how (use).....................a computer in her Computer Science class. 2- My sister (be)............... a doctor because she always (take).......................care of sick people. 3- Would you like (come)........................my house. 4- She (watch)........................TV tonight. 5- Listen! They ......... (sing) karaoke in their room. Put suitable prepositions in each gap.( in, on, fromto, between and, next to, near, in front of, about, under, to, opposite ) 1. The pen is _________ the table. 322 English 7 2011-2012
- Give the correct tense of the verbs in blanks to complete the following sentences
- Put suitable prepositions in each gap.( in, on, fromto, between and next to, near, in front of, about, under, to, opposite )
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
11. The meeting starts _______ 7.30 AM 2. They are waiting ______ front of the zoo. 3. I often listen _____ music ____ the evening.15. The science books are _____ the left 4. They go swimming ____ Saturday. 5. The newspapers are _____ the rack 6. The party starts _____ 4.30 _____ 6.00PM _______the middle. 7. Shell be 12 ____ her next birthday. 8. You can find the books ______ the 9. Its often cold _____ December. 10. My birthday is ________ Oct th 27 II. Reading Choose the best answer to complete the passage
- Read the passage and choose the best answer to complete the passage
Hello, I (1)________ Loan, I live with my parents (2)_________ Ho Chi Minh City. My (3)___________ number is 8562364. I often talk (4)__________ my friends on the phone. Now I am calling Hoa to talk about Minhs birthday party (5)______ 15th November. Minh is (6)______ his birthday party at home in - Make the afternoon so I want to ask Hoa questions about What we shall buy and give him at the party. I also want to tell her to wait for me at home and I will go there to meet her (7)________ foot and then go with her (8)_______ Minhs house. 1. a. is b. are d. do 323 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc c. am
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 2. a. live b. lives living c. to live d. c.
G/v : Nguyn Th
3. a. address b. telephone house d. home 4. a. to 5. a. in 7. a. by b. about c. with b. at b. on b. to c. to c. in
d. in d. on d. with
6. a. have b. to havec. having d. has 8. a. come is c. from d.
III. Writing Make questions for underlined parts: 1. Its about 3 km from here to the zoo ___________________________________ 2. We go to school 6 days a week. ___________________________________ 3. This envelope is 200 dong. _________________________________ 4. We go to school 6 days a week. _________________________________ 5. We go to school by bus. _________________________________ Production ( 5 mins) Homework ( 1 min) Discussion - Whole class
- Ask them to leanrt by heart main - Listen points and vocabulary from Unit 9 to carefully Unit 15. - Take notes - Have them prepair The Second Term Examination. Preparing date: 05/5/2010 324
English 7 2011-2012
Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 103nd: REVISION I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do some exercises to prepare for the final test. II. Language contents: . 1. Vocabulary: Review. 3. Grammar: Review. III. Teaching aids: pictures.extra board IV. Teaching procedures: Stages Contents Activities Warm up * Networds Work in ( 5 mins) groups What do you do in your free time ?
Review ( 10 mins)
1. Comparatives and superlatives: - Call students * Comparatives: to give te form of comparatives Adjective + ER + and than.. superlatives. * Ex: Nam is taller than I Gives Minh is bigger than his father. examples. *Superlatives:: The + Adjective + EST * Ex: -Mexico is the biggest city in the world. -That is the smallest house. Students give te form of Give comparatives and superlatives. examples - Listen to the teacher and take notes. 2. Suggestion: ( Chung ta hay..) 325 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
Lets + Vo .. * Ex: Lets go to Huong pogoda. - Call students to remind suggestion with Lets - Remind how to suggest. ................. Practice ( 24 mins) the
- Listen to the teacher. Give examples - Take notes
I. Pronunciation - Choose the word Choose the word that has a different that has a pronunciation from the others of different each group pronunciation 1. a. hotel b. go c. post d. from the others of hospital each group 2. a show b. now c. know d. arrow 3. a. stool b. room c. afternoon d. door 4. a. meat b. reader c. ready d. Read ten overseas sentences and 5. a. horrible b. hour c. hundred d. then hold complete. 6. a. plays b. stops c. walks d. wants II. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY Choose the best answer: 3. After class, Nam goes home and - Choose the ________ videos. best answers. a. watch b. watching c.watches d. to watch 4. A running nose , a slight fever, coughing and sneezing are the __ of the common cold. a.symtoms b. deseases c. Correct in sickness d. illness their paper 3.Sugar gives us __________ and we fell less hungry. a.power b. health c.energy d. 326 Nm hc
English 7 2011-2012
G/v : Nguyn Th
happy 4.Is your __________ one meter forty centimeters? a.weight b.height c.body d. tall 5.Ha likes candy. ______ do we. a.Neither b.so c. either d. too 6.Lets ___________ to the zoo. a.gone b.going c.go d. to go 7.He is a good teacher. He teaches very ______________. a.bad b.well c.good d. fast 8. General Giaps Forces defeated the ________ in 1954. a. American b. French c.Japanese d. China 9.Millions of young people play____________________. a.chess b.musical instrument c. video games d. football 10.We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to Jacques Cousteaus __ a. action b.invention c. composition d. introduction
- Give the correct tense of the verbs in blanks to complete the following sentences
- Put suitable prepositions in each gap.( in, on, fromto, Give the correct tense of the between and verbs in blanks to complete the next to, near, in following sentences front of, about, 1. My father (not play) _____________ under, to, tennis in his free time. opposite ) 2. They (have) _______________ some new clothes soon. 3. Mai (wash) _______________ her hands before the meals. 4. Long (watch) ______________ TV every night. 5. Mary usually (go) _____________ to school on foot, but now she (go) 327 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
___________ to school by bike. 6. Mai often (get) _____________ up late but tomorrow she (get) ____________up early because she (have) _____________a test. 7. How often (you/read ) ________________ a newspaper ? Everyday. 8. What (your father/do ) _________________ ? Hes a teacher but he (not work ) ________________at the moment. II. Reading Read the passage then choose True or false Hoa is my friend. She is in class 7B . She is 12 years old. She lives in a small house with her parents. It is about 300 meters from her house to the school so she always goes to school on foot. We often go to her house. Her house is very lovely. I like her house very much. There is a yard in front of her house with a lot of colorful flowers. There are six room in her house, but I like the living room best because it is the most beautiful room in her house. 1. Hoa is a student 2. She is thirteen now. _______ _ _______ _
- Read the passage and choose the best answer to complete the passage
- Make questions
3. Her house is far from _______ the school. _ 4. There are four rooms in _______ her house. _ 5. There is a yard behind _______ her house. _ 328 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn 6. There are a lot flowers in the yard.
G/v : Nguyn Th
of _______ _
7. I like the living room _______ very much. _ 8. The bathroom is the _______ most beautiful best. _ III. Writing Write the following sentences as directed 1. My friends have more candies than I. -> I dont ___________________________________ 2. She eats fewer chocolate than Mai. -> Mai eats _________________________________ 3. My house is between the bank and the book store -> The bank ____________________ 4. Tuan is Mais younger brother -> Mai is ___________________________________ 5. Fruit is better than candy -> Candy is _________________________________ Production ( 5 mins) Homework ( 1 min) * Discussion
- Ask them to leanrt by heart main Whole class points and vocabulary from Unit 9 to Unit 15. - Have them prepair The Second Term Examination. V. Self- valuation 329 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................
330 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc
G/v : Nguyn Th
Period 104th Period 105th: dc)
The second semester test ( Thi theo ca phng gio dc) Correcting The second semester test ( Theo p n ca phng gio
331 English 7 2011-2012 Nm hc

Giao An Anh 7

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Giao An Anh 7

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Week 1 Preparing date: 19/8/

+ Doesnt +V( without To ) I We + V ? Do He You Does +V?

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

G/v : Nguyn Th good; Me, too;

Activities - Ss listen and slap the suitable response . -Work in Individual

-Work in whole class

Ba . ....morning,... nice........again. ..........thanks.

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Preparing date 22/8/2011 Teaching date: 27/8/2011

Back to school Lesson: 2 A.Friends A2

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Pre reading Time:15

- Sts practice reading in chorus, individuals.

- Ss predict and give feedback

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn While reading Time:15

- Ss play the game in two groups.

Post reading Time:8

Ss work individually to write another text.

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Preparing date:24/8/2011 Teaching date: 29/8/2011

Presentati English 7 2011-2012

-Hang on the picture . 11 Nm hc

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn on Time:15

G/v : Nguyn Th -Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher and practice

-Work in pairs -Individual

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Prodution Time:8

Back to school Lesson4 - Section: B4,5

Preparing date : 5/9/2011 Teaching date: 7/9/2011

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Activities - Work in whole class

-Work in whole class

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Practice Time:15

G/v : Nguyn Th - Listen to the tape

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Back to school Lesson5 : - Section: B6-7

Preparing date: 4/9/2011 Teaching date: 8/9/2011

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

-Ss work in pairs to ask and answer to complete the survey.

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

-Rewrite the information in the survey youve got.

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Preparing date: 6/9/2011 Teaching date: 10/9/2011

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Whole class Work pairs in

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Whole class Work pairs Work pairs in in

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (1 mins) about telephone number.

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn telephone A4. the -

G/v : Nguyn Th S1: Whats your Whole class

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn What...do tomorrow

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Preparing date: 14/9/2011 Teaching date:17/9/2011

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn (9mins)

Preparing date: 13/9/2011 Teaching date: 19/9/2011

Trng THCS ng Yn Thu Huyn Stage